JP5823642B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a determination process for winning a jackpot is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  That is, in this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the starting port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, the jackpot is determined with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which a large number of game balls are paid out to the player is performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine, when the determination process for winning the jackpot is performed, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Next, an expected effect is made as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this way are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that suggests that the jackpot has been won. As a result, the player enjoys the above-mentioned expected production about whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination, and enjoys this, and finally obtains the result of the determination process from the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. You will be able to recognize and play.

  However, there is a concern that the game entertainment interest will be lowered because only the expected effect by such a plurality of symbols is a monotonous effect. Therefore, for example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, two start ports (first start port and second start port) are prepared as start ports, and whether or not the jackpot is won separately for these start ports. I'm going to perform the expected production.

JP 2006-320422 A

  However, there is a concern that such a conventional gaming machine may have a decrease in gaming interest.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

The present invention adopts the following configuration in order to solve the above-described conventional problems.
[Configuration 1]
A jackpot for determining whether or not the game is a big hit based on the start opening capable of entering the game ball, the effect display means for performing the display effect in a predetermined display area, and the game ball entering the start port A jackpot determination means capable of performing a determination process, a jackpot game process execution means for executing a jackpot game process that allows a player to win a prize based on the result of the jackpot determination process being a jackpot, and the jackpot Effect display control means capable of executing a predecessor effect that indicates a jackpot expectation degree at which the result of the determination process is a jackpot before the execution condition of the jackpot determination process is satisfied, The start opening and a second start opening that is easily received when the specific movable piece is operated are provided, and as the preceding effect, a specific preceding in which an effect execution condition can be established only under a specific condition The jackpot determination means includes a first jackpot determination means capable of performing a jackpot determination process when the start opening into which the game ball is inserted is the first start opening; A second jackpot determining means capable of performing a jackpot determining process when the starting hole into which a game ball is placed is the second starting slot; a jackpot determining process by the first jackpot determining means; and the second jackpot determining process. And a digestion order control means for controlling so that they are digested alternatively and avoiding simultaneous digestion with the jackpot determination processing by the jackpot determination means. Both the first effect display according to the result of the jackpot determination process by the jackpot determination means and the second effect display according to the result of the jackpot determination process by the second jackpot determination means are common displays Based on the result of the control by the digestion sequence control means and the specific display means that can appear at the same time, the simultaneous display of the first effect display and the second effect display is avoided and they are selected in the common display unit. Alternative production control means for controlling so that it can appear as a single unit, and second side specification capable of executing control for causing the second side specific display to appear based on the game ball entering the second starting port Both the display control means, the game ball entrance information to the first start port and the game ball entrance information to the second start port can be acquired, and the first effect display and the In spite of the fact that the second effect display can alternatively appear on the common display section, the second side corresponding to the game ball entering the second start port side When the number of occurrences of the specific display is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, A specific preceding effect execution control means for controlling the line condition to be established, and the specific preceding effect executed when the effect execution condition is satisfied is a display pattern of a plurality of patterns having different jackpot expectations A gaming machine characterized in that, when the effect execution condition that can be satisfied only under the specific condition is satisfied, it can be notified that the effect execution condition is satisfied.

According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown to the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member, game panel, and panel holder in other embodiment of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which opened the cover body in a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a dispensing control board box that comes into contact with the lower side of the cover body. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit from back lower. It is the perspective view which looked at the side decoration member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the side decoration body from back. It is a front view of a center character. It is a top view of a center character. It is an enlarged view in the arrow A of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit in a center accessory from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the opening / closing drive mechanism in a 2nd attacker unit. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 162, (B) is sectional drawing in which the 2nd big winning opening in (A) shows an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the warp channel | path unit in the center accessory for every member, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable stage unit in a center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable stage unit from back. It is a top view of a movable stage unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable stage unit and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable stage unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the movable stage piece in a movable stage unit in a cross section. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit from the front side, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the spherical guide unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the spherical guide unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | generation unit into the back top front unit and the back top back unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | presentation unit into the back top front unit and the back top back unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front back front unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a back upper unit. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the back front front unit by the AA line in FIG. It is a front view of the back upper unit in the back movable production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper back unit from the front diagonally lower side. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the back-up rear unit taken along the line AA in FIG. 192. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the seesaw mechanism in a back-up rear unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect ball rotation mechanism in a back upper unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the front back front unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back upper unit in a back upper movable production | presentation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit in the back unit from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right unit in a back right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right unit in a back right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the back right unit in a back right movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a motion of the whole back right movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which each turning decoration unit of the back back movable production | presentation unit in a unit moved to the retreat position. It is a front view which shows the state which each turning decoration unit of the back back movable production | presentation unit moved to the appearance position. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right part turning decoration unit in a rear movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 212 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right part turning drive unit in a back rear movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front side with the right part turning decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 214 from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper turning decoration unit in a back back movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 216 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper turning drive unit in a back back movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front side with the upper turning decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 218 from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower turning decoration unit in a rear movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 220 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower turning drive unit in a back back movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front side with the lower turning decoration unit. FIG. 222 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 222 viewed from the rear side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning range of each turning decoration unit in a back back movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the movable effect by a back back movable effect unit. 226 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a movable effect by a back and rear movable effect unit different from FIG. It is a front view which shows a motion of the back movable production | presentation unit in a technique board. 228 is a front view showing the movement of the back movable production unit following FIG. 227; FIG. It is a front view which shows the motion of the back right movable production | presentation unit in a game board. It is a front view which shows the motion of the back back movable production | presentation unit in a game board. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by a main control MPU 4100a mounted on a main control board 4100 of the main board 4000. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a 2nd special symbol advance process. It is a figure which shows a prior | preceding determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a 1st special symbol advance process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a high anticipation fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a low anticipation fluctuation pattern table setting process. 7 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables A and B. 10 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables C to P. It is a list of the variation pattern determined based on the high anticipation variation pattern tables Q to T. It is a list | wrist of the fluctuation pattern determined based on low anticipation fluctuation pattern tables U-Z, AA, and BB. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of small hit establishment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a latent suggestion process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the latent probability variation means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the latent accuracy degree variation means which performs a latent accuracy suggestion process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the suggestion time control means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the suggestion time control means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the suggestion restriction | limiting means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the suggestion restriction | limiting means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the suggestion restriction | limiting means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process of the suggestion restriction | limiting means which performs a latent suggestion process. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating reach jackpot production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot achievement production. It is a figure for demonstrating the probability variation continuation determination production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the probability variation continuation determination production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the probability variation continuation determination production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the probability variation continuation determination production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the probability variation continuation determination production A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of lighting / extinguishing of the some lens part 2684. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of lighting / extinguishing of the some lens part 2684. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of lighting / extinguishing of the some lens part 2684. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the state of the lower right effect display part 2681 and the some lens part 2684. FIG.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and below the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards for controlling electrical components, a power board 1136, and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is provided. It is detachable. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to this embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. The lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. . Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support protrusion 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined with respect to the support collar hole 47. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 47, The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view in which the right unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which FIG. 28 is seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, speakers 121 and 391). Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent lamp) is arranged in a transparent cylinder (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing metal plate 143 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 includes an open side outwardly protruding protrusion 153 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 and the lower reinforcing metal plate 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall is provided with two guide protrusions 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and below the right guide protrusion 182a in the rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, and 296, and LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, etc., for relaying and supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. This is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140, see FIG. 231) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). The reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. The reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e as shown in the figure. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration board 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 247 are provided by the rotating lamp base 242a. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided, and the attachment step portion 261b is rotated from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotation unit base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection board 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotating part base 262 and the rotating part holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, whereby the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening portion on a side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decorative board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit and the ball rental unit after removing the dish unit. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit in an exploded view from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the dish unit, and (B) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the dish unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates, a control button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate 310 and that can be operated by the player in accordance with a game state (game situation), and a plate unit main body 320 below the plate 310 dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be arranged and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 to be described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative board 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with cash or a prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game contents (game effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that is lowered toward the right side and the front side in plan view, and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear portion of the second portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between a partition wall 311f where a rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and becomes shorter as it goes to the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. A sphere supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened so as to face the slide 356. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 at the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e that is disposed above the handle base mounting port 321d and faces a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and disposed at the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321. A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326, which is smaller than the left cover 326 and plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that is arranged substantially at the center and decorates the periphery of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-like than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to face the speaker openings 321a of the main body 321. The through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330 and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 and a duct cutout portion 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to metallic luster plating on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decorating board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and allows game balls to circulate. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a spherical flow path opening 345 corresponding to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 to be described later and penetrating in a substantially L shape. A latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrating in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted; In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is disposed in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301 that is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position where the second ball outlet 312 is closed and an open position where the second ball outlet 312 is opened A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing part 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar part that extends from the closing part 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in a plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above and formed on the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be diffused widely, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 on the upper end side. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a position facing the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to vibration of the lower speaker 391 It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball thus played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a protrusion and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the one-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 always keeps the rotation operation member 414 from the original position. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  A cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  In addition, the wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c is supported on the shaft support side along the lower back side of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. Further, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and when the game is continued by leaving it, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) may be activated and the payout operation may be stopped or the ballistic operation may be stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball may stop and the game may not be continued even though the jackpot is being hit. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game with a big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Thus, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in clogging of the balls. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of the present example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the glass unit exploded and shown from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the unit frame 451, a terminal plate support portion 451d that protrudes leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is higher than the vertical center Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front side (inner side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 is fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately, and has an atmosphere different from conventional pachinko machines ( A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800 (corresponding to a payout unit of the present invention), a full unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and a game board 4, a board unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except 4, a power supply board 1136, and the like are provided together, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. And a main body frame main body 500 on which various components such as these are mounted.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to protrude forward is opened. In addition, a board positioning projection 576 (see FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like) for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 at a side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is provided at a position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the hitting ball rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through-hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for damming a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper side of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. Are formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( An open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably mounted on the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 543 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the responsible person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protruding piece 110d having a large protruding amount is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in an assembled state according to another embodiment, cut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 83 is a game board of FIG. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of a front component member, a game panel, a panel holder, and the like that mainly constitute the main body, as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 as viewed diagonally from the rear.

  Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 600 formed of plywood such as a veneer board, a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the game panel 600, and a front component member 601. And a function display unit 640 that is fixed, and the gaming panel 600 is configured to partition the rear end of the gaming area 605.

  On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 is formed with a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and a foul port adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 608 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 475 of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 470 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps vertically. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate sticking part 615 in the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, various game devices provided in the game area 605 (for example, the general winning port 2104, the starting ports 2101 and 2102, the first grand winning port 2103, etc., see FIG. 148) are won. The display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 6 and the like) as a display device arranged on the back surface of the back box 621 that can guide the aligned balls on the downstream side is arranged at the approximate center of the game area 605 is controlled. A peripheral board box 622 in which the liquid crystal control board 4150 and the peripheral control board 4140 are stored is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. Formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Example of other holding structure of game panel in game board 4]
Next, an example of another holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of this example is composed of a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630, and a front provided with an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630 It mainly includes a component member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the drawing, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. . The gaming panel 600 is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a that are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 600c is formed by cutting out substantially half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  The game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 2400, a first attacker unit 2100 (see FIG. 148, etc.) and the like. In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. Note that the openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and since the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 is connected, the strength of the gaming panel 600 is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the gaming board 4 has a size that includes the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 of the first embodiment (in this example, , Approximately 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and forwards from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of projecting pins 630 c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the portion 630a and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 to be inserted is formed, the panel 600 extends along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 78) of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. The holder 630 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter in a mixed manner so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 630j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l, so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 is formed with a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 630.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the present example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engagement step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 600 in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting apparatus, and to install the obstacle nail planting apparatus. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the prize opening, etc. is changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the gaming panel 600 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by simply replacing them.

  Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 or the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, is a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and its bottom is in the horizontal direction. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the front side at the approximate center, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600, it can be discharged downward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. ing. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side in the rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting part 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing part 624a of the main control board box 624 is the It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the first attacker unit 2100 described later When a game ball wins at one start port 2101, the segment indicator SEG 1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins at the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, the segment indicator SEG 2 Special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won to the first start port 2101 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 uses the number of winning game balls as the holding number. Lights up or flashes. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lighting color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2302 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and the movable piece 2105 is opened and closed) The game symbol that is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2302 is turned on by the normal symbol memory display 646 with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange colors. The LED 10 displays the lighting color as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the two-round display lamp 648a is lit to notify that the number of times (rounds) that the first big prize opening 2103 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while 15 The round display lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol storage display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol storage display 646, a game status display 647, and a security display 648 are allocated to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage A configuration in which the display 646, the game status display 647, and the security display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. Going on. In addition, these LEDs 1 to LED may be assigned different functions depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, for example, a round display for notifying the number of times (number of rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is opened when winning a jackpot A lamp may be assigned.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game status display 647, and the security display 648, the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the security display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment display openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and in the non-game area of the game board 4. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing part 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol variation display by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 displays the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the change display of the special symbol by winning the game ball at the first start port 2101 are shown. As a result, the player changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2101 by visually observing the group Grp1 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 649. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various information related to the special symbol variation display by the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 is displayed. For example, when a game ball starts to win the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the number of winning game balls is set as the number of reserves. The second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinks. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning the game ball at the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp2 sectioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby winning the game ball in the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415. It is possible to easily confirm various information related to the special symbol variation display by.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2105 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2105 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball moves to the second start port 2102. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. A star is printed so that it can be distinguished from the game status indicator 647, the game status indicator 647, and the security indicator 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2302 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2302, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the security display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Further, the seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are associated with the seal management number 649a and managed. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state are 2 times and 15 times. In the case of adding, the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 due to, for example, reducing the number of start ports from two to one can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at the approximate center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In this working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 that are integrally formed and are accommodated inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the opposite direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball hitting device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the front side wall in the slide direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left space inner wall Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is positioned at the right of the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 92A). 93, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state where one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. It will be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747, During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in one row alternately at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball path unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is such that the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 are deleted, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. It is. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines for easy understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825 And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  This counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a bent fitting wall 802 is formed with a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball disconnection passage 880 to be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. 823 is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and penetrates through the unit sub plate 825. After passing through the hole 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover are held in a state where the unit sub-plate 825 is sandwiched by fitting a screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 so as to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. 866.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and drilled in the aluminum heat sink 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided above the second gear 844 so as to be rotatable on a shaft 845 that is supported at the other end in the shaft hole 846. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in the shaft is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. One end of the rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801, and the other end is supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the region 840, and detected in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. A disk 850 is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with each other about the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted into the gear cover 866 side. The cover 866 is formed with a mounting hole 867 that is provided at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are engaged with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. The unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in the matched state. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later). A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed in a position below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmitting member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 as the disposing member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844, 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 immediately below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of payout balls is about the normal, the spring 913 has a strong resilience, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a locking base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 to a corresponding screw with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment board 1011. The lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 123, a plate-shaped closing member 1038 is disposed at the lower end of the U-shaped base 1001, and the lower end of the U-shaped base 1001 is closed by the closing member 1038. A wire or the like is inserted into the U-shaped base body 1001 from the lower side of the U-shaped base body 1001 to prevent fraud. The closing member 1038 includes locking portions extending upward from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and these locking portions are locked to the lower hook through opening 1002 and the locking protrusion 1004 in the U-shaped base body 1001. As a result, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached to the lower end.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Of the plurality of rivet slots 1042, the uppermost rivet slot A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the abutting portion 1067 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth without any backlash. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the door hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. By aligning the stopper 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. it can. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as that shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054 is in the raised state. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hook state 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 forward. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally released, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay substrate 1102, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, a payout control substrate box 1105, a main drawer relay substrate 1107, and a sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached by being covered with a board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used.

  In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do.

  Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. ing. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186.

  Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4150 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and a region having a high step is an attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower side of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the dispensing control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for externally (for example, installing a variety of information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal in a game hall). The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The

  The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 4, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of

  The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

  In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Accordingly, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking projection 1117. Can be installed easily.

  In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the dispensing control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above.

  The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above.

  The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically.

  Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than control board 4100 and liquid crystal control board 4150, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, housed in dispensing control board box 1105 The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a.

  As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 1200a is removed from the drawer connector 1200. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 147. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back when the cover body is opened, FIG. 140 is a side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 141 is a side view of the pachinko machine viewed from the open side. 142 is a perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body in the pachinko machine, FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 143, FIG. 146 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 143, and FIG. 147 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-- in FIG. It is C sectional drawing.

  The cover body 1250 covers the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 and is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish-like shape with a slightly elongated rectangular peripheral side wall (in the upper half of the side wall portion or the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of air holes are formed.) A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) that are inserted and supported by a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 on the side wall on one side of the vertical side. ) Shaft support pin 1251 is integrally formed. Further, an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed on the other side of the vertical side slightly toward the upper part. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components including the main control board box 624 provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case has a through hole through which a locking hole 1253 is formed above and below the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3. 1254 is formed. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 1250 of this example covers up to the back surface of the main control board box 624 in the closed state, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside is connected to the main control board box 624 and the inspection device. The connection operation opening 1255 is formed at a position corresponding to the test terminals 624b and 624c, and the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is closed with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1250 closed. It comes in contact with the surface.

  More specifically, the connection operation opening 1255 is formed in a rectangular shape on the lower side wall 1256 of the lower side of the cover body 1250, and the size thereof is formed in the main control board box 624 as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a that is exposed to the outside and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection device is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1257 and an abutting projection 1258 that project against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1255. The standing wall 1257 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1255, and the contact protrusion 1258 protrudes relatively low from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1255 along the one side opening edge. As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the standing wall 1257 and the contact protrusion 1258 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent unauthorized actions on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1255.

  Next, the abutting lower side wall 1256 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1250 will be described. When the cover body 1250 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the abutting lower side wall 1256 is shown in FIG. 146 and FIG. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 144, an abutting low step surface formed on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 mounted on the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 is formed lower than the surface. 1181a is formed. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box mounting region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being mounted over the mounting area, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the mounting area, and is fixed so as not to move in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a that is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1256 of the cover body 1250, so that the cover body 1250 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 139, the cover body 1250 of this example is provided with guide protrusions 1259 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1250 is closed above and below the through hole 1254. Yes. The guide protrusion 1259 is disposed at a position corresponding to the guide hole 569b formed at the top and bottom of the locking protrusion 570 formed on the locking wall 569 on the main body frame 3 side, and closes the cover body 1250. By inserting the guide protrusion 12159 into the guide hole 569b, the cover body 1250 is positioned at a predetermined position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1250 is closed, and the back side thereof is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in this embodiment, the rear wall of the discharge port 730), and the tank rail. When viewed from the side of the rear end wall of the member 740, the same vertical surface is obtained. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. It is easy to grasp, so it is easy to load and stack, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed.

  The cover body 1250 according to the present embodiment has been described above. However, the cover body 1250 has a contact lower side wall that is a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1250 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since 1256 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101, the payout control board box 1105 is used for the frame unless the cover body 1250 is opened. The substrate holder 1101 cannot be removed. And, since the cover body 1250 is locked by a padlock or the like hooked on the locking protrusion 570 penetrating through the through hole 1254, the fraudulent act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1250 is, of course, Unauthorized acts on the dispensing control board box 1105 that is not covered by the cover body 1250 can also be prevented.

  Even when the cover body 1250 is closed and locked with a padlock or the like, since the connection operation opening 1255 is opened in the cover body 1250, the test equipment is provided in the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing. Or the RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when the software or the like goes out of control and recovers. In addition, a standing wall 1257 and a contact projection 1258 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1255 so that no gap is formed between the connection control opening 1255 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 1250 is in a closed state, its back side is the same vertical surface when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740, When viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part of the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing, and the entire thickness is uniform and easy to grasp when transporting the pachinko machine 1. It is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined upside down, the wiring that protrudes from the back side of the opponent's pachinko machine etc. It can be installed very smoothly without worrying.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 153. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 152 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 153 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 461 as a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 605 behind the front component member 601 A panel 600, a frame-like panel holder 630 that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 and holds the gaming panel 600 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 601, and an out port outside the gaming area 605 A function display unit 640 disposed below the front structural member 601 on the right side of 606 and a function display seal 64 attached to the front surface of the function display unit 640. It has a, and.

  The game board 4 is viewed from the player side mainly on the front unit 2000 disposed on the front side of the game panel 600, on the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 600, and on the rear side of the back unit 3000. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 that can be attached and can display a predetermined effect image.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 includes a box-shaped back box 621 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600 and opened on the front side, and a game ball attached near the front surface in the back box 621 and received by the front unit 2000. A ball guiding unit 3100 for guiding the player to a predetermined position below, a back-upper movable effect unit 3200 attached near the upper right corner above the opening 621c in the back box 621 and movable according to the game state, and back-upper movable A rear right movable production unit 3400 which is arranged below the production unit 3200 and on the right side of the opening 621c in the back box 621 on the right side and movable according to the gaming state, and at a substantially central position in the front and rear direction in the back box 621. A protective cover 3010 having a transparent plate shape, which is approximately the same size as the opening 621c, and is disposed between the protective cover and the rear wall 621b of the back box 621. Includes a back after moving direction unit 3500 for moving, the in accordance with the gaming state.

  The back box 621 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 621c penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 621b, and the display screen faces forward (player side) from the opening 621c. A liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 621b of the back box 621.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4, as will be described in detail later, to the peripheral substrate box 622 containing the peripheral substrate 4010 including the peripheral control substrate 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, and to the liquid crystal display device 1400 And an inverter board box 1410 containing an inverter board 1411 for supplying power.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area 605 and above the out port 606 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and the left side of the first attacker unit 2100. The side decoration member 2200 is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and is arranged on the left side slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600. A gate member 2300, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2400 that is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600.

[2-2. First attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the first attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side.

  The first attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, and then the game panel 600 It is fixed to the front. The first attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) in which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the first attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2101, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101, and the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 disposed below the second start port 2102. And a rectangular first big prize opening 2103 extending greatly in the left-right direction.

  The first start port 2101 of the first attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 disposed below the first starting port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 are pivotally supported at the lower end side so that the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other. Is ready to accept. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  The first big prize opening 2103 of the first attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a first oblong opening / closing member 2106 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can close the opening. The first opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported so that the lower side is pivotable. In a substantially vertical state, the first big prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side is the front side. When it is rotated so as to move to the position, the first big prize opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the first big prize opening 2103 is a variable prize opening by the first opening / closing member 2106.

  More specifically, the first attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 and has a first start port 2101 and a first big prize port 2103 at the center in the left-right direction. And a plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming a general winning port 2104, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first start port 2101 of the base plate 2110 and pivotally supported for the second start. A central receiving member 2111 that forms a mouth 2102 and is open on the upper and rear sides, and a first opening / closing member 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and opens and closes the first big prize opening 2103 is pivotally supported. In addition, a pair of movable pieces 2105 and an attacker drive unit 2120 that rotationally drives the first opening / closing member 2106 are provided.

  The base plate 2110 of the first attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a collar portion 2110a that extends backward from the first start port 2101 and can guide the game ball.

  The central receiving member 2110 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the first attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 on the front surface in a relief shape. Although not shown in detail, the center receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the first attacker unit 2100 supports a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and supports the start port solenoid 2121. A start port drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the rear side, a first attacker solenoid 2124 for opening and closing a first opening / closing member 2106 for closing the first big prize opening 2103, and a first attacker solenoid 2124 are supported and One open / close member 2106 is pivotally supported, and is supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and an attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123. Second start to detect a game ball received in the second start port 2102 The mouth sensor 2127 and the second start mouth sensor 2127 are supported at different positions and are supported by the first count sensor 2128 for detecting a game ball received by the first big prize opening 2103 and the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A start port solenoid 2121, a first attacker solenoid 2124, a second start port sensor 2127, and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the first count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in a protruding direction by a coil spring. The second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so as to protrude forward at the rear position. In the first attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of members is engaged via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of the movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second start port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. A first guiding portion 2123a for guiding a game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b to the right in a front view; And a second guide portion (detailed illustration is omitted) that moves downward.

  Although not shown, the first attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start-port solenoid 2121. . In the first attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the first attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the first opening / closing member 2106 is connected via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. Is rotated so as to move relatively forward, and the first big prize opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the first attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, the starting port solenoid 2121 is energized and driven in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate 2302 in a gate member 2300 to be described later. 2105 is expanded and can be received. In addition, the first grand prize opening 2103 is in accordance with a special lottery result (for example, a special lottery result is received) by receiving a game ball in the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102 (start winning prize). In the case of “big hit”, the first opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern to be received by energizing the first attacker solenoid 2124.

  Although not shown, the first attacker unit 2100 includes a first grand prize opening decoration board that is supported by the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. The inside of the mouth 2103 can be decorated with light emission.

  In the first attacker unit 2100, the game ball received in the first start port 2101 is sent to the right ball discharge passage 3106b of the right ball guide member 3106 in the ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later. It has become. The game ball received in the second starting port 2102 is discharged downward after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. Furthermore, the game balls received in the first grand prize opening 2103 are discharged downward after being detected by the first count sensor 2128.

  In the first attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the first attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the first attacker solenoid 2124 is moved to the first opening / closing member 2106 as much as possible. Since it is arranged at a close position, the longitudinal dimension of the first attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the first attacker unit 2100 can be reduced. It can be secured more widely.

[2-3. Side decoration member]
Next, the side decoration member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side decorative member as seen from the front. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the side decoration viewed from the rear. The side decoration member 2200 in the game board 4 is a lower part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, with respect to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the first attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. After being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 and is formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605. The side decoration member 2200 includes three general winning ports 2201 that are open upward and are capable of receiving game balls.

  The side decoration member 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 and has a main body member 2202 having an arcuate opening frame 2202a substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605, and is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body member 2202. A box-shaped receiving member 2203 that forms a general winning opening 2201 and is opened at the top and rear, a transparent plate-like side lens member 2204 that is inserted into the opening frame 2202a of the main body member 2202, and an upper end of the main body member 2202 A shelf member 2205 having a shelf portion 2205a that is attached to the front portion and swells forward from the front surface of the game panel 600 and has an upper surface that is lowered toward the right side, and the side decoration member 2200 includes a side lens member 2204 Side decorative board (not shown) with multiple LEDs mounted on the front and rear side, and side A board cover 2208 attached to the rear surface of the body member 2202 so as to cover the decorative substrate from the rear side, and a.

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative member 2200 has three general winning ports 2201 arranged on the downstream side of the shelf member 2205, and the game balls flowing down on the shelf 2205 a of the shelf member 2205 are used as general winning ports. It is possible to guide to the 2201 side, that is, the center side in the left-right direction in the game area 605.

  Further, the main body member 2202 of the side decoration member 2200 includes a collar portion 2202b that extends rearward and can guide the game ball to the rear side at a position corresponding to each general winning opening 2201. The side decoration member 2200 is configured such that the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 is discharged by the flange portion 2202b of the main body member 2202 and the discharge passages 3108a and 3108b of the left sphere guiding member 3108 in the ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. , 3108c. The game sphere sent to the left sphere guiding member 3108 is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize opening sensor 3122.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 154 and 155. The gate member 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the transparent game panel 600 in the left and right direction center and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2302 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the gate 2302 can be detected by a gate sensor 2304 disposed in the gate 2302. It is like that.

  Note that the gate member 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 600 is the thickness of the game panel 600. It will fit within.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 165. 161 is a front view of the center accessory, and FIG. 162 is a plan view of the center accessory. FIG. 163 is an enlarged view taken along arrow A in FIG. 161. Further, FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the center member disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. is there.

  The center accessory 2400 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the plate-like game panel 600. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 605. In the center accessory 2400, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame inclines in a substantially straight line at a steep angle from the approximate center in the left-right direction from the approximate center in the left-right direction to the lower left in the front view. The bent shape is gently inclined from the lower end toward the left side. On the other hand, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame of the center accessory 2400 is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605.

  In the center accessory 2400, the outer peripheral shape of the left frame is formed in a substantially linear shape that hangs downward, and the outer peripheral shape of the right frame is continuous with the curved upper portion and is lower than the left frame. The extended game area 605 has an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery. Further, the center accessory 2400 is formed in a gently curved shape such that the shape of the lower frame is lowest at the center in the left-right direction from the lower end of the left frame, and from the position of about 3/4 of the whole from the left end. It is a shape that hangs in an arc shape toward the lower end of the right frame.

  In the center accessory 2400, the outer periphery of the right side of the upper frame and the outer periphery of the right frame are shaped substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605 as described above, and when attached to the game panel 600, A gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed on the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2400. Further, the center accessory 2400 has an upper frame left side, a left frame, and a lower frame as described above, and when attached to the game panel 600, a game area is formed on the left outer periphery of the center accessory 2400. A region having a predetermined width is formed between the inner periphery of 605.

  The center accessory 2400 includes a plate-like flange portion 2401 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 600, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2401 and flows down in the game area 605 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall portion 2402 that guides to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame, and an upper left side (upper frame) of the peripheral wall portion 2402 at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction (inclined so that the left side is lowered at a steep angle) The upper out port 2403 (see FIG. 150) that opens to the lower surface of the inclined surface (to be able to receive a game ball) and the left side of the upper out port 2403 (near the gently inclined right end on the left side of the upper frame) And a second big prize opening 2404 opened upward.

  The center accessory 2400 has an upper warp inlet 2405 that opens to the upper part of the left outer periphery (the outer periphery of the left frame) in the peripheral wall 2402 and allows a game ball in the game area 605 to enter, and below the upper warp inlet 2405. And a lower warp inlet 2406 that opens to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the left outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2402 and allows a game ball in the game area 605 to enter.

  Further, the center accessory 2400 is provided with a stage 2410 that is disposed at the lower part of the frame (upper part of the lower frame) and is supplied with game balls that have entered from the upper warp inlet 2405 and the lower warp inlet 2406. The stage 2400 in the center accessory 2400 is supplied with a game ball that has entered from the upper warp entrance 2405, and the supplied game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released forward, A second stage 2412 that is disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2411 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released forward; A third stage 2413 is provided, which is supplied with game balls that have entered from the warp inlet 2406, is capable of rolling the game balls in the left-right direction, and returning to the game area 605.

  The center accessory 2400 has a third start port 2415 in which a game ball rolling on the second stage 2412 can be received, and a chance entrance 2416 in which a game ball rolling on the third stage 2413 can enter. And a chance outlet 2417 that is opened at a position immediately above the first starting port 2101 in the flange portion 2401 when the game ball that has entered from the chance inlet 2416 is released. The center accessory 2400 includes a movable stage piece 2418 that periodically changes the form of the rolling surface in the second stage 2412.

  More specifically, the center accessory 2400 of this example is formed in a frame shape that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600, and includes a flange portion 2401, a peripheral wall portion 2402, an upper out port 2403, a second grand prize port 2404, a lower portion. A center main body 2450 having a warp inlet 2406, a third stage 2413, and the like, a second attacker unit 2500 that is attached to the left side of the upper frame of the center main body 2450 and opens and closes the second big prize opening 2404, and a left frame of the center main body 2450 And a warp passage unit 2550 for guiding a game ball that has entered from the upper warp inlet 2405 and the lower warp inlet 2406 to the stage 2410.

  The center accessory 2400 has a first stage 2411 and a second stage 2412 in the stage 2410, a third start port 2415 and a movable stage piece 2418, and a movable stage unit 2600 attached to the lower frame of the center main body 2450; Upper left rear decorative member 2650 disposed at the upper left corner in the frame of main body 2450, upper left front decorative member 2660 disposed on the front side of upper left rear decorative member 2650 and having an upper warp inlet 2405, and the inner side of the right frame of center main body 2450 And a right front decorative member 2680 disposed on the front side of the right rear decorative member.

[2-5A. Center body]
Next, the center main body 2450 in the center accessory 2400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the center main body 2450 includes a frame-shaped main underframe 2452 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 and constitutes the base of the entire center accessory 2400. Further, the center main body 2450 in the center accessory 2400 includes an upper decoration member 2454 attached to the front right side of the upper frame of the main frame 2452, an upper center decoration member 2456 attached to the left end front surface of the upper decoration member 2454, and an upper center decoration. A front plate member 2458 disposed on the left side of the member 2456 and covering the front surface of the second attacker unit 2500, and a left end of the second big prize opening 2404 disposed on the left side of the front plate member 2458 and a part of the peripheral wall portion 2402 An upper left shelf member 2460 to be formed and a left middle decorative member 2462 having a lower warp inlet 2406 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left frame of the main base 2452 frame are provided.

  Further, the center main body 2450 is attached in the lower frame of the main frame 2452 and has a third stage member 2464 having a third stage 2413, and is attached to a position below the third stage member 2464 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plate-like lower stage decoration member 2466 having a plurality of through portions 2466a and chance outlets 2417 and a transparent portion provided with a plurality of bulge portions 2468a inserted from the rear side with respect to the through portions 2466a of the lower stage decoration member 2466. A lens member 2468 having optical properties, and an arc-shaped right outer periphery decorative member 2470 that is attached to the outer periphery of the right frame of the main frame 2452 and forms a part of the peripheral wall 2402 and decorates the outer periphery of the right frame. .

  Further, the center main body 2450 is disposed on the rear side of the upper decoration member 2454, and includes an upper decoration board 2471 for illuminating and decorating the upper decoration member 2454, an upper left decoration board 2472 for illuminating and decorating the upper left rear decoration member 2650, and a lens member 2468. A lower-stage front decorative board 2474 that is arranged on the rear side and that illuminates and decorates the front side under the stage, and a lower right that is attached to the lower right part of the main frame 2452 and illuminates and decorates the lower-right effect display portion 2681 in the right front decorative member 2680 described later. Connection of the central decorative board 2476 and the movable stage drive motor 2608, the third starting port sensor 2618, the position detection sensor 2620, etc. of the movable stage unit 2600 disposed on the rear side of the lower right central decorative board 2476 and the main control board 4100 On the lower right relay board 2478 that relays the An upper left relay that is attached to a position just behind the upper left shelf member 2460 and relays the connection between the second big prize opening decoration board 2514 of the second attacker unit 2500 described later, the first lamp driving board 3014, and the second lamp driving board 3018. A substrate 2480.

  The main frame 2452 in the center main body 2450 is provided with a through hole 2452a at a predetermined position on the left frame, up and down, through which a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction and entering the upper warp inlet 2405 and the lower warp inlet 2406 can pass. ing. A game ball is sent to the warp passage unit 2550 attached to the rear side through the passage hole 2452a. The main frame 2452 has a three-dimensional shape imitating a cloth with a front surface extending from the lower part of the left frame to the left part of the lower frame, and includes a plurality of slits 2452b penetrating in the front-rear direction. The game ball which distribute | circulates the inside of the warp channel | path unit 2550 arrange | positioned on the back side through the slit 2452b can be visually recognized now favorably from the player side.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the main frame frame 2452 is a rear unit in which the upper part of the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction and received in the upper outlet 2403 formed in the upper decoration member 2454 is disposed rearward. The upper ball guiding member 3102 in the upper ball guiding member 3102 has a discharge hole 2452c that guides it to the upper ball discharge passage 3102a, and a game ball that is received by the second big prize opening 2404 and discharged from the discharge port 2506d of the second attacker unit 2500 to the left. And a discharge ball passage 2452d that is guided to the passage port 2554b of the warp passage unit 2550 on the rear side from the left end.

  The upper decoration member 2454 in the center main body 2450 has a front surface formed in a three-dimensional shape simulating a cloth, and is formed of a light-transmitting material. In the upper decoration member 2454, the upper outer peripheral surface constitutes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2402. As shown in the drawing, the upper center decorative member 2456 includes a polyhedral center decorative portion that is substantially circular and simulates a jewel, an annular decorative portion that surrounds the outer periphery of the central decorative portion, and that simulates a base of jewelry, and an outer side of the annular decorative portion. And an outer periphery decorative portion that flutters in a spiral shape, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surface. In this example, the annular decorative portion has a different color from the others.

  In addition, the front plate member 2458 in the center main body 2450 is a transparent member so that the game ball received in the second big prize opening 2404 can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the front plate member 2458 is formed with an inclined surface 2458a that is lowered rearward on the upper surface. By this inclined surface 2458a, the game ball flowing down from above can be guided backward. The left middle decorative member 2460 is formed in a three-dimensional shape simulating a cloth, and is formed of a light-transmitting material. The left middle decorative member 2460 includes a plurality of slits 2460a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and visually recognizes the game balls circulating in the warp passage unit 2550 arranged from the player side to the rear side through the slits 2460a. Be able to.

  The third stage member 2464 in the center main body 2450 has a third stage 2413 that is gently curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest on the upper surface. The third stage member 2464 expands to the left and right as it goes forward in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and expands to the left and right as it extends from the substantially center in the front-rear direction to the rear in the front guide part 2464a. A rear guide portion 2464b that is lowered, and a front wall portion 2464c that extends upward from the front end of the third stage 2413 excluding the front guide portion 2464a and prevents the game ball from falling from above the third stage 2413. ing.

  The third stage member 2464 is configured such that a game ball rolling on the third stage 2413 by the front wall portion 2464c is released from the positions of the front guide portion 2464a and the rear guide portion 2464b in the center in the left-right direction. When the rolling game ball is guided by the front guide portion 2464a, it is released to the front side and returned to the game area 605, and when it is guided by the rear guide portion 2464b, it is released to the rear side and is a chance. The entrance 2416 is entered. As shown in the drawing, the rear guide portion 2464b is formed smaller than the front guide portion 2464a, and the probability of being guided to the front side by the front guide portion 2464a is larger than the probability of being guided to the rear side by the rear guide portion 2464b. The probability of being guided to is low.

  The center main body 2450 of the center accessory 2400 of the present example is an upper opening opened upward by the upper frame of the main underframe 2452, the upper left end of the upper decoration member 2454, the front plate member 2458, and the right end of the upper left shelf member 2460. A double winning opening 2404 is formed. Like the first grand prize opening 2103, the second big prize opening 2404 is configured to extend in the left-right direction. When the second big prize opening 2404 is in the open state, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the general winning award. Game balls are easier to accept than the mouth 2201 and the like.

[2-5B. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2500 in the center accessory 2400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 169. FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the second attacker unit in the center accessory as seen from the front. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view in which the second attacker unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the opening / closing drive mechanism in the second attacker unit. Further, FIG. 169 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 162, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the second large winning opening in FIG.

  The second attacker unit 2500 of the center accessory 2400 is for opening and closing a second major prize opening 2404 formed in the upper frame of the center main body 2450, and is attached to a predetermined position of the main frame 2452. The second attacker unit 2500 includes a plate-like second opening / closing member 2502 that opens and closes the second grand prize opening 2404, an upper case member 2504 that supports the second opening / closing member 2502 to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and an upper case member. A lower case member 2506 having a ball receiving portion 2506a attached to the lower side of 2504 and serving as a bottom portion of the second big prize opening 2404, and a second opening / closing member 2502 sandwiched between the lower case member 2506 and the upper case member 2504. A second attacker solenoid 2508 for driving to open and close, and a transmission member 2510 for transmitting driving of the second attacker solenoid 2508 to slide the second opening / closing member 2502 in the front-rear direction.

  The second attacker unit 2500 includes a second count sensor 2512 that is attached to a predetermined position of the lower case member 2506 and detects a game ball received by the ball receiving portion 2506a through the second major winning opening 2404, and an upper case. And a second big prize opening decoration board 2514 that is sandwiched between the member 2504 and the lower case member 2506 and illuminates and decorates the inside of the ball receiving portion 2506a (in the second big prize opening 2404).

  As shown in the drawing, the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 includes a plate-like door portion 2502a that closes the second big prize opening 2404 and has a lower left side in a front view, and a rear end of the door portion 2502a. Extending part 2502b extending horizontally rearward from the rear side, and is formed in a substantially T shape in plan view. The second opening / closing member 2502 has an inclined surface 2502c formed at the front end of the upper surface of the door portion 2502a and lowering toward the front, and a connecting hole 2502d extending vertically through the rear end of the extension portion 2502b. And.

  Further, the upper case member 2504 of the second attacker unit 2500 divides the left and right ends of the second winning prize opening 2404 from the guide portion 2504a that slides and supports the left and right ends of the door portion 2502a in the second opening / closing member 2502. A plate-like side wall portion 2504b extending in the vertical direction and a solenoid holding portion 2504c for holding the upper side of the second attacker solenoid 2508 are provided. The upper case member 2504 is formed of a translucent material.

  In the lower case member 2506, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 2506a is lowered toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the vicinity of the right end portion is lowered toward the rear side. The lower case member 2506 includes a ball inlet 2506b through which a game ball received by the ball receiving portion 2506a can pass and a second count sensor 2512 downstream of the ball inlet 2506b. A mounting portion 2506c, a discharge port 2506d for discharging the game ball detected by the second count sensor 2512 downward, a solenoid holding portion 2506e for holding the lower side of the second attacker solenoid 2508, and a second grand prize opening decoration board And a substrate holding portion 2506f for holding 2514.

  Further, the lower case member 2506 includes a bearing portion that holds the transmission member 2510 in a rotatable manner, although illustration is omitted. The lower case member 2506 is formed at a position where the bearing portion that rotatably supports the transmission member 2510 is at the same height as the lower end of the second attacker solenoid 2508 (the tip of the plunger 2508a). The lower case member 2506 is formed of a material having translucency.

  The second attacker solenoid 2508 of the second attacker unit 2500 includes a plunger 2508a that advances and retreats downward when energized, and a disc-shaped flange portion 2508b fixed to the tip of the plunger 2508a. The second attacker solenoid 2508 is in a state where the plunger 2508a is moved downward in a normal state (when not energized), and is retracted upward when energized. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the 2nd attacker solenoid 2508 is urged | biased by the direction which the plunger 2508a advances below by elastic members, such as a coil spring.

  Further, the transmission member 2510 of the second attacker unit 2500 extends in the left-right direction, and is supported by the bearing portion of the lower case member 2506, and extends from the left end portion of the shaft portion 2510a to the left in a crank shape. An engaging portion 2510b that engages with the flange portion 2508b of the solenoid 2508, and a connecting piece 2510c that extends upward in a plate shape from the shaft portion 2510a and is inserted into the connecting hole 2502d of the second opening / closing member 2502 are provided. As shown in FIG. 168, it is formed in a substantially L shape in a side view. The engaging portion 2510b of the transmission member 2510 has two protrusions that are lined up and down and protrude to the left. By inserting a plate-shaped flange portion 2508b between the protrusions, the engaging portion 2510b is engaged with the flange portion 2508b. Can be combined. Further, the connecting piece 2510c is formed in a columnar shape whose upper end extends in the left-right direction.

  In the second attacker unit 2500 of the present example, the plunger 2508a of the second attacker solenoid 2508 is advanced downward in a normal state (when no power is supplied), and the engagement with the flange portion 2508b at the tip of the plunger 2508a. The connecting piece 2510c of the transmission member 2510 rises substantially vertically from the shaft portion 2510a by the joint portion 2510b (see FIG. 168 (A)). In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 169 (A), the front end of the second opening / closing member 2502 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2401 of the center accessory 2400, and the front plate member 2458 disposed in front is A gap SK1 is formed between which the game ball cannot pass. That is, the second opening / closing member 2502 prevents the game balls from being received into the second grand prize opening 2404, and the second big prize opening 2404 is in a closed state where it cannot be received.

  Then, when the second attacker unit 2500 is energized to the second attacker solenoid 2508, the flange portion 2508b at the tip of the second attacker unit 2500 and the plunger 2508a retreat and rise, and the engaging portion 2510b of the transmission member 2510 engaged with the flange portion 2508b. As a result, the entire transmission member 2510 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 2510a, and the upper end of the connecting piece 2510c rising substantially vertically by this rotation relatively moves rearward. It becomes. When the connecting piece 2510c of the transmission member 2510 moves relatively rearward, the inner wall of the connecting hole 2502d of the second opening / closing member 2502 in which the connecting piece 2510c is inserted is pushed backward, and the entire second opening / closing member 2502 is moved. It will slide backward (see FIG. 168 (B)).

  In the state where the second attacker solenoid 2508 is energized, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), the front end of the second opening / closing member 2502 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2401 of the center accessory 2400. A gap SK2 through which a game ball can pass is formed between the front plate member 2458 arranged. That is, the second opening / closing member 2502 does not prevent the game balls from being received into the second grand prize opening 2404, and is in an open state in which the second big prize opening 2404 can be received.

  Incidentally, in this example, the gap SK1 between the front end of the second opening / closing member 2502 and the front plate member 2458 when the second large winning opening 2404 is in the closed state is about 1/3 of the diameter of the game ball. The size is double (0.3 times). The gap SK1 may be 0.1 to 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball.

  As described above, the second attacker unit 2500 of this example slides the second opening / closing member 2502 in the front-rear direction to open and close the second big prize opening 2404 by energizing the second attacker solenoid 2508. In response to a special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is “small”) when a game ball is received (start winning prize) at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. At the time of “winning”, the second attacker solenoid 2508 is energized and the second big prize opening 2404 (second opening / closing member 2502) is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern so as to be received.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the second attacker unit 2500 forms a predetermined amount of gap SK1 with the front plate member 2458 when the second big prize winning opening 2404 is closed. The protrusion amount of the second opening / closing member 2502 from the front surface of the gaming panel 600 is reduced as much as possible, and the impact resistance performance of the second opening / closing member 2502 can be enhanced, and the game ball flowing down from above is the first. Even if it abuts against the two opening / closing members 2502, it can be made difficult to break. Further, the front surface of the second opening / closing member 2502 is provided with an inclined surface 2502c, and when a game ball comes into contact with the inclined surface 2502c from above, the force is distributed not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction by the inclined surface 2502c. Therefore, the impact force applied to the second opening / closing member 2502 and the like can be reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2502 (second attacker unit 2500) can be made difficult to break.

  In addition, inclined surfaces 2458a and 2502c are provided at both the upper end of the front plate member 2458 and the front end of the second opening / closing member 2502 in the second attacker unit 2500, and the game ball flowing down from above is connected to the front plate member 2458. When simultaneously contacting both of the second opening / closing members 2502, the impact force can be distributed to both, and the impact applied to the second opening / closing member 2502 and the like can be further reduced.

[2-5C. Warp passage unit]
Next, the warp passage unit 2550 in the center accessory 2400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the warp passage unit in the center accessory, disassembled for each member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the warp passage unit 2550 in the center accessory 2400 has a box-like front passage member 2552 that extends in the vertical direction and has an open rear side, and is disposed on the rear side of the front passage member 2552, and has an inverted L shape. And a formed passage unit body 2554.

  The front passage member 2552 in the warp passage unit 2550 passes through the upward entrance 2552a and the upward entrance 2552a, which are disposed near the upper end and penetrate the front and rear direction and allow the game balls entering the upper warp entrance 2405 to pass therethrough. A front upper warp passage 2552b that guides the game ball to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side of the front passage member 2552, and a game ball that has entered the warp passage 2406 that penetrates in the front and rear direction below the front upper warp passage 2552b. , The lower warp passage 2552d for guiding the game ball that has passed through the lower entrance 2552c to the lower end on the rear surface side of the front passage member 2552, and the lower right side of the lower warp passage 2552d as viewed from the front. And a lower warp outlet 2552e through which a game ball can pass.

  The front passage member 2552 is disposed along the rear side of the left frame in the main frame 2452, and the upward inlet 2552a and the downward inlet 2552c correspond to the two discharge holes 2452c of the main frame 2452. Formed in position. Further, the front passage member 2552 is provided on the left and right side walls in the lower warp passage 2552d at a position where a plurality of protrusions 2552f protruding into the lower warp passage 2552d and extending in the front-rear direction are staggered in the vertical direction. ing. The plurality of protrusions 2552f can suppress the speed of the game ball flowing down in the lower warp passage 2552d.

  The passage unit main body 2554 in the warp passage unit 2550 includes a plate-like warp passage closing portion 2554a that is attached to the rear end of the front passage member 2552, and closes the rear openings of the front upper warp passage 2552b and the lower warp passage 2552d, and the warp passage. A passing port 2554b which is disposed at a position above the front passage member 2552 at the upper end of the closing portion 2554a and penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the game ball passed through the discharge ball passage 2452d in the main frame 2452 can pass; A plate-like discharge ball passage closing portion 2554c that extends rightward from the mouth 2554b in a front view and closes the rear opening of the discharge ball passage 2452d in the main frame 2452.

  The passage unit main body 2554 is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower part of the front upper warp passage 2552b of the front passage member 2552 in the warp passage closing portion 2554a, and passes through the front upper warp passage 2552b while passing through the front upper warp passage 2552b. A middle entrance 2554d that is allowed to pass, a game ball that has passed through the middle entrance 2554d is guided to the lower end on the rear surface side of the warp passage closing portion 2554a, and a rear upper warp passage 2554e and a rear upper warp passage 2554e that are opened rearward. The upper warp outlet 2554f that is opened to the right in front view at the lower end of the lower end of the door and allows the game ball to pass therethrough, and protrudes from the left and right side walls in the rear upper warp passage 2554e into the rear upper warp passage 2554e and extends in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protrusions 2554g arranged at positions that are staggered with respect to the direction.

  The passage unit main body 2554 includes a decorative portion 2554h that is continuous with the right end of the warp passage closing portion 2554a when viewed from the front and the lower end of the discharge ball passage closing portion 2554c and has a three-dimensional shape imitating a cloth. Further, the passage unit main body 2554 guides the game ball that has passed through the passage port 2554b to the left in the front view in the left-right direction on the rear surface side of the warp passage closing portion 2554a, and the left end of the discharge ball passage 2554i. And a discharge opening 2554j through which a game ball can pass and is opened to the left in plan view. The passage unit main body 2554 can suppress the speed of the game ball flowing down in the rear upper warp passage 2554e by a plurality of protrusions 2554g in the rear upper warp passage 2554e.

  Further, the warp passage unit 2550 of this example closes the warp passage rear lid that closes the rear opening of the rear upper warp passage 2554e in the passage unit main body 2554 and the rear opening of the discharge ball passage 2554i in the passage unit main body 2554. A discharge ball passage lid. In the warp passage unit 2550, as shown in FIG. 164 and the like, an upper warp outlet 2554f is disposed on the rear side of the lower warp outlet 2552e, and the lower warp outlet 2552e and the upper warp outlet 2554f are arranged in the front-rear direction at the lower end. It is in a state. Further, in the warp passage unit 2550 of this example, each component is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and circulates in the front upper warp passage 2552b, the lower warp passage 2552d, the rear upper warp passage 2554e, and the discharge ball passage 2554i. The game ball to be played can be viewed from the outside.

  When the game ball that has entered the upper warp entrance 2405 of the center accessory 2400 enters the upward entrance 2552a of the front passage member 2552 through the upper passage hole 2452a of the main frame 2452, the warp passage unit 2550 The front upper warp passage 2552b formed on the rear surface of the passage member 2552 is guided downward to the middle position in the vertical direction, and enters the passage unit main body 2554 disposed on the rear side from the lower end of the front upper warp passage 2552b. It enters into the opening 2554d, flows down in the rear upper warp passage 2554e formed on the rear side of the passage unit main body 2554, and is discharged from the upper warp outlet 2554f at the lower end to the right in the front view. A game ball can be supplied to one stage 2411.

  Further, the warp passage unit 2550 receives the game ball that has entered the lower warp entrance 2406 of the center accessory 2400 and enters the downward entrance 2552c of the front passage member 2552 through the lower passage hole 2452a of the main frame 2452. The lower warp passage 2552d formed on the rear surface of the front passage member 2552 is guided downward, and is discharged from the lower warp outlet 2552e at the lower end of the lower warp passage 2552d to the right side in front view to the third stage 2413 in the center main body 2450. A game ball can be supplied.

  Further, in the warp passage unit 2550, the game balls received in the second big prize winning port 2404 in the center accessory 2400 are discharged from the discharge port 2506d of the second attacker unit 2500 to the discharge ball passage 2452d of the main frame 2452. Rolled toward the left end of the discharge ball passage 2452d as viewed from the front, and passed through the passage port 2554b of the passage unit main body 2554 opened to the rear left side of the discharge ball passage 2452d, it was formed on the rear surface of the warp passage closing portion 2554a. It is sent to the left in the front view by the discharge ball passage 2554i, and can be discharged leftward from a discharge port 2554j formed at the left end of the discharge ball passage 2554i.

[2-5D. Movable stage unit]
Next, the movable stage unit 2600 in the center accessory 2400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 171 to 176. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the movable stage unit in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the movable stage unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 173 is a plan view of the movable stage unit. FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the movable stage unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the movable stage unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable stage piece in the movable stage unit in cross section.

  The movable stage unit 2600 in the center accessory 2400 is configured to extend in the left-right direction as a whole, and includes a first stage 2411 and a second stage 2412 that constitute a stage 2410 disposed on the upper surface of the lower frame of the center accessory 2400, A movable stage piece 2418 that periodically changes the form of the rolling surface of the second stage 2412, a third start port 2415 that can receive a game ball rolling on the second stage 2412, and the first of the center main body 2450. A chance entrance 2416 into which a game ball rolling on the three stages 2413 can enter. In addition, the movable stage unit 2600 includes a part of the third stage 2413 on the front side of the first stage 2411 in the vicinity of the left end portion when viewed from the front.

  In the movable stage unit 2600, the first stage 2411 is formed so that the left and right ends are the highest, and the first stage 2411 is smoothly lowered in a curved shape from the left end toward the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. , Toward the right side of the center in the left-right direction (a position corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area 605) at a height that is lower than the left end, and then increases smoothly and then decreases to the right end. It is formed in a wave shape that rises toward the top. In the movable stage unit 2600, the third start port 2415 and the chance entrance 2416 are arranged at the same position in the left-right direction as the position that is higher to the right with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the first stage 2411.

  In addition, the movable stage unit 2600 has a gently inclined surface in which the second stage 2412 is lowered from a position that is lower to the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the first stage 2411 toward the position of the third start port 2415. A movable stage piece 2418 is disposed at the left end of the second stage 2412. In other words, the movable stage piece 2418 is disposed at the same position in the left-right direction as the position that is lowered to the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the first stage 2411.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the movable stage unit 2600 is such that the length of the second stage 2412 in the left-right direction extends from a position on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction to a position where the movable stage piece 2418 is disposed. On the left side of the movable stage piece 2418, the third stage 2413 is bent backward, and the first stage 2411 and the third stage 2413 are adjacent to each other.

  Further, the movable stage piece 2418 of the movable stage unit 2600 is generally formed in a plate shape, and has a rolling surface 2418a that is inclined so that the front end and the left end are slightly higher from the approximate center in the front-rear direction to the front side. , A protruding portion 2418b protruding upward from the front end of the rolling surface 2418a and extending in the left-right direction, a detecting piece 2418c extending leftward from the rear end, and a concave sliding groove 2418d formed on the lower surface and extending in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 174 and the like). The movable stage piece 2418 can guide the game ball to the right side where the second stage 2412 is disposed by the rolling surface 2418a.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the movable stage unit 2600 has a second stage 2412 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2411, and a step is formed between the first stage 2411 and the second stage 2412. ing. The second stage 2411 is formed at a position higher than the third stage 2413, and a step is also formed between the second stage 2411 and the third stage 2413 (see FIG. 149, etc.). And the 3rd starting port 2415 and the chance entrance 2416 are formed in the wall of the level | step difference between stages, and are in the state opened toward the front.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the movable stage unit 2600 extends in the left-right direction, has a first stage 2411 and a part of the third stage 2413 on the upper surface, and a third start port 2415. A main body 2602 that slidably holds the movable stage piece 2418 in a predetermined position below the first stage 2411; a sub-body 2604 that is attached to the front side of the main body 2602 and has a second stage 2412 and a chance entrance 2416; A drive bracket 2606 attached to the lower surface of the main body 2602, a movable stage drive motor 2608 attached to the lower side of the drive bracket 2606, a drive gear 2610 fixed to the rotating shaft of the movable stage drive motor 2608, and a drive gear 2610 The action of meshing and disposing directly below the movable stage piece 2418 2612, a gear shaft 2614 for rotatably supporting the action gear 2612 with respect to the drive bracket 2606, and a crank pin 2616 protruding upward from a position eccentric to the outside of the rotation center on the upper surface of the action gear 2612. And a sliding groove 2418d that covers the crank pin 2616 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is formed on the lower surface of the movable stage piece 2418.

  A main body 2602 of the movable stage unit 2600 extends upward from the rear end of the first stage 2411 that extends in the left-right direction and is curved in a wavy shape in the up-down direction, and prevents the game ball from dropping backward from the first stage 2411. The plate-shaped rear wall 2602a and the fan-shaped first guide that is disposed at the lowest position on both sides of the right side of the first stage 2411 with respect to the center in the left-right direction and that expands to the left and right and becomes lower toward the front. And a protruding wall 2602c protruding upward from the front end of the first stage 2411 excluding the position where the first guide portion 2602b is formed.

  The rear wall 2602a of the main body 2602 has a height that is more than half of the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not fall off to the rear side of the first stage 2411. On the other hand, the protruding wall 2602c has a height of about 1/8 to 1/4 with respect to the outer diameter of the game ball, and can be overcome depending on the rolling condition of the game ball rolling on the first stage 2411. It has become. The main body 2602 is configured such that a game ball rolling on the first stage 2411 is discharged forward from either one of the two first guide portions 2602b.

  Further, the main body 2602 can pass through the wall of the step between the first stage 2411 and the second stage 2412 in the front-rear direction below the left guide portion 2602b of the first stage 2411 and can be inserted through the movable stage piece 2418. A horizontally long insertion hole 2602d, a second guide part 2602e that is substantially the same width as the movable stage piece 2418 at a position on the front side of the insertion hole 2602d, and lower to the front, and both left and right ends of the second guide part 2602e and the insertion hole 29602e. A rail portion 2602f that is arranged and extends in the front-rear direction and slidably supports the movable stage piece 2418, and a guide passage that guides a game ball disposed below the first stage 2411 and received in the third start port 2415 downward. 2602g. A third start port sensor 2618 for detecting a game ball received in the third start port 2415 is mounted in the guide passage 2602g. The main body 2602 is also provided with a barrier portion 2602 h that extends upward at the right end of the first stage 2411 and prevents the game ball from dropping off from the movable stage unit 2600 to the right.

  The sub main body 2604 in the movable stage unit 2600 is attached to the front side of the first stage 2411 on the right side of the second guide portion 2602e in the main body 2602, and continues from the right side of the second guide portion 2602e of the main body 2604 to the third start port. A second stage 2412 extending to the right end of 2415, a guide wall 2604a projecting upward from the front end of the second stage 2412 excluding the position where the second guide portion is formed, and a first guide portion on the right side of the first stage 2411 A skip portion 2604b that guides the game ball released from 2602b to the front third stage 2413, and a barrier portion 2604c that extends upward from the right end to prevent the game ball from dropping to the right side of the movable stage unit 2600. I have.

  The guide wall 2604a in the sub main body 2604 is slightly higher than the protruding wall 2602c of the first stage 2411 in the main body 2602, and the game ball supplied to the second stage 2412 is guided to the third start port 2415 with a very high probability. Can be done. Further, the skip portion 2604b has protrusions protruding upward at the left and right ends, so that the game ball is difficult to drop off from the left and right of the skip portion 2604b. Furthermore, the upper end of the barrier portion 2604 c is substantially the same height as the barrier portion 2602 h of the main body 2602.

  The sub body 2604 includes a chance passage 2604d that guides the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2416 downward and then guides it forward. The chance passage 2604d is configured such that the lower end portion for guiding the game ball forward is positioned behind the chance outlet 2417 formed in the lower stage decoration member 2466 in the center main body 2450, and is guided by the chance passage 2604d. The played game ball is released from the chance exit 2417.

  The movable stage unit 2600 detects a game ball received in the third start port 2415, and is supported by a guide passage 2602g in the main body 2602. The third start port sensor 2618 is attached to the drive bracket 2606. A position detection sensor 2620 for detecting the detection piece 2418c to detect the slide position in the front-rear direction, and a light beam toward the upper stage 2410 disposed below the main body 2602 and on the left side of the second guide portion 2602e. A possible stage left decorative substrate 2622, an in-stage decorative substrate 2624 which is disposed on the left side of the third start port 2415 below the first stage 2411 in the main body 2602 and can emit light forward, and an in-stage decorative substrate 2624 is arranged on the opposite side across the third start port 2415 and emits light forward. A stage right decorative substrate 2626 capable morphism, and a, a back cover 2628 plate-like attached to the rear surface of the coated side body 2602 after the stage right decorative board 及 2626 beauty stage in decorative substrate 2624.

  The movable stage unit 2600 in the center accessory 2400 of this example is configured such that the movable stage piece 2418 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 2602f of the main plate 2604 and the movable stage piece 2418 extends in the left-right direction. A crank pin 2616 protruding from the action gear 2612 is slidably inserted into the moving groove 2418d. In the movable stage unit 2600, when the drive gear 2610 is rotationally driven by the movable stage drive motor 2608, the action gear 2612 meshed with the drive gear 2610 rotates, and the crank pin 2616 revolves around the axis of the action gear 2612. It becomes. As the crank pin 2616 revolves, the crank pin 2616 slides in the left-right direction in the sliding groove 2418d of the movable stage piece 2418, and at the same time, the movable stage piece 2418 slides in the front-rear direction.

  Thus, in the movable stage unit 2600 of this example, when the crank pin 2616 revolves and is positioned most forward, the movable stage piece 2418 is also moved to the most forward position, and the crank pin 2616 revolves and is positioned most rearward. Then, the movable stage piece 2418 is also in the position retracted most rearward. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), in the state where the movable stage piece 2418 is most advanced, the front end of the movable stage piece 2418 is substantially at the same position as the front end of the second stage 2412 (in the drawing, the protrusion amount TS1). The game ball guided forward by the left first guide portion 2602b of the first stage 2411 falls on the rolling surface 2418a of the movable stage piece 2418, and the right side of the first ball is guided by the rolling surface 2418a. Guided to the second stage 2412.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), when the movable stage piece 2418 is most retracted, the front end of the movable stage piece 2418 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the first stage 2411 (outside of the game ball). The position projected from about 1/3 to about 1/2 with respect to the diameter, in the drawing, is the projection amount TS2), and the game ball guided forward by the first guide portion 2602b of the first stage 2411 is movable. Without falling on the rolling surface 2418a of the stage piece 2418, it falls to the second guide portion 2602e arranged below the movable stage piece 2418, and is guided to the third stage 2413 by the second guide portion 2602e. It has become so.

  As shown in the figure, this movable stage piece 2418 has a protruding portion 2418b at the front end, so that a game ball that has fallen onto the rolling surface 2418a and could not get over the protruding portion 2418b becomes a rolling surface 2418a. Can be sent to the second stage 2412 on the right side. Note that the game ball that has passed over the protrusion 2418b of the movable stage piece 2418 is sent from the front end of the movable stage piece 2418 to the third stage 2413 in front.

  Further, since the movable stage piece 2418 has a protrusion 2418b having a triangular cross section at the front end, when the movable stage piece 2418 moves backward to some extent, the game ball falls onto the rolling surface 2418a of the movable stage piece 2418. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being sent to the second stage 2412 side. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the necessity of retracting the front end of the movable stage piece 2418 to the same position as the front end of the first stage 2411, and to prevent the rear end of the movable stage piece 2418 from projecting greatly backward from the movable stage unit 2600. In addition, the sliding range in the front-rear direction of the movable stage piece 2418 can be reduced.

  In the movable stage unit 2600 of this example, the movable stage drive motor 2608 rotates at a constant speed, and the movable stage piece 2418 moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction at a constant cycle.

[2-5E. Upper left rear decorative member]
Next, the upper left rear decoration member 2650 in the center accessory 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. The upper left rear decoration member 2650 is attached to the front surface of the main frame 2452 on the lower side of the left shelf member 2460 in the center main body 2450 as shown in the figure. The upper left rear decoration member 2650 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that is horizontally long and imitates a cloth, and decorates the lower left corner of the upper frame of the center accessory 2400. The upper left rear decorative member 2650 includes a plurality of circular lens portions on the front surface, and the upper left front is disposed on the front side by appropriately refracting light from the upper left decorative substrate 2472 disposed on the rear side by these lens portions. The decorative member 2660 can be decorated with light emission. The upper left rear decoration member 2650 is formed of a synthetic resin having translucency.

[2-5F. Upper left front decorative member]
Next, the upper left front decorative member 2660 in the center accessory 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. This upper left front decorative member 2660 is attached to the front surface of the upper left corner of the main frame 2452 in the center main body 2450, and from the lower part of the upper central decoration member 2456 in the center main body 2450 to the left side to the left end of the upper frame. After extending, it is formed in an inverted L shape extending downward along the left frame of the center main body 2450. The upper left front decorative member 2660 has a smooth three-dimensional shape that substantially imitates a cloth, and an upper warp inlet 2405 is formed on the upper left side surface. In addition, the upper left front decorative member 2660 includes an upper upper warp passage 2662 that guides the game ball that has entered the upper warp inlet 2405 to the upper passage hole 2452a in the rear main frame 2452.

  The upper left front decorative member 2660 includes an upper left decorative member 2664 having the same shape as the upper central decorative member 2456 on the front surface near the upper warp inlet 2405. The upper left front decorative member 2660 includes a plurality (three in this example) of chain-like lens members 2666 in which a plurality of transparent bead balls are passed through a flexible thread-like hanger. As shown in the figure, the lens member 2666 has one end attached to a position corresponding to the lower position of the second big prize opening 2404 and the other end attached to the right side of the upper left decoration member 2664. It is installed as if it hung down.

  Further, the upper left front decorative member 2660 includes a plurality of slits 2668 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion along the left frame of the center main body 2450, and the front upper warp passage 2552b disposed on the rear side through these slits 2668. The game balls circulating in the game can be viewed from the player side.

[2-5G. Rear right decorative member]
Next, the right rear decoration member 2670 in the center accessory 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. As shown in the drawing, the right rear decoration member 2670 is formed in a vertically long shape along the right frame of the center main body 2450, and the right end is formed in an arc shape. The right rear decorative member 2670 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a cloth on the surface, and includes a plurality of circular lens portions.

[2-5H. Front right decorative member]
Next, the front right decorative member 2680 in the center accessory 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165 and the like. This front right decorative member 2680 is attached to the front surface of the lower part of the right frame of the center main body 2450, and is a circular lower right effect display arranged at a position corresponding to the front side of the lower right central decorative board 2476 of the center main body 2450. Part 2681, a three-dimensional decoration part 2682 that covers the outer periphery of the lower right effect display part 2681 and extends upward from the upper right end along the right frame of the center main body 2450, and the lower right effect display part 2681 On the left side, there is provided a plate-like barrier portion 2683 arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative portion 2682 and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The lower right effect display portion 2681 of the front right decorative member 2680 is not shown, but according to the color of light (for example, red light, blue light) emitted from the lower right central decorative substrate 2476 disposed on the rear side. Characters, designs, etc. corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed. Further, the barrier portion 2683 is formed to be continuous at the same height as the barrier portions 260h and 2604c of the movable stage unit 2600, and the game ball flowing down in the game area 605 is in contact with the decorative portion 2682 of the right front decorative member 2680. The contact can be prevented.

  The front right decorative member 2680 is disposed between the lower right effect display portion 2681 and the barrier portion 2683, and includes a plurality of lens portions 2684 arranged in an arc along the outer periphery of the lower right effect display portion 2681. A lower right peripheral wall portion 2585 forming a right outer wall of the portion 2682 and a part of the peripheral wall portion 2402 of the center accessory 2400, and a lower right portion along the surface of the game panel 600 from the rear end of the lower right peripheral wall portion 2585. The lower right flange portion 2686 that extends in the opposite direction to the effect display portion 2681 and forms a part of the flange portion 2401 in the center accessory 2400 and the lower right flange portion 2686 on the front side of the lower right peripheral wall portion 2585 are opposed to each other. And a plate-like extending piece 2687 extending from the decorative portion 2682.

  The lower right decorative member 2680 is disposed on the rear side of the plurality of lens portions 2684 located on the upper side from the substantially vertical center of the lower right effect display portion 2681, and can be irradiated with light forward. The decorative substrate 2688 and the lower right upper decorative substrate 2688 are arranged on the lower side of the lower right effect display portion 2681 from the substantially vertical center to the lower side of the plurality of lens portions 2684 and are radiated forward. And a lower right lower decorative board 2689 made possible.

  Further, the lower right decorative member 2680 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the extending piece 2687, extends substantially radially with respect to the game area 605, and a plurality of front protrusions 2690 arranged along the circumferential direction of the lower right peripheral wall portion 2585. The lower right flange portion 2686 is disposed at a position that is alternated along the circumferential direction of the lower right peripheral wall portion 2585 with respect to the plurality of front protrusions 2690 at a position facing the extending piece 2687 in the lower right flange portion 2686 and protrudes forward and has a game area 605. And a plurality of rear protrusions 2691 extending substantially radially (see FIG. 163 and the like).

  The lower right decorative member 2680 is provided with three front protrusions 2690 and four rear protrusions 2691 in this example. From the upper side, the rear protrusions 2691, the front protrusions 2690, the rear protrusions 2691, ... are alternately formed in this order. As a result, the game balls that have flowed down along the peripheral wall portion 2402 are alternately brought into contact with the rear protrusion 2691 and the front protrusion 2690 to reduce the flow speed of the game balls, so that the game balls are moved to the out port 606 and the like. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as breakage due to a strong collision.

  Further, the lower right decorative member 2680 is provided with an extended piece 2687 in which a front protrusion 2690 is extended from the decorative portion 2683, and the extended piece 2687 is easily bent in the front-rear direction. When the game ball that abuts and jumps to the front side collides with the rear side of the extended piece 2687, the extended piece 2687 bends to the front side and can absorb and mitigate the impact caused by the collision. The effect of slowing down the game ball by 2691 can be further enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 163, the upper two protrusions 2691 have a protrusion amount approximately twice that of the other front protrusions 2690 and the rear protrusions 2691. Thereby, the game ball flowing down along the peripheral wall portion 2402 can be easily brought into contact with the rear projection 2691, so that the game ball is surely collided with the rear projection 2691 to the front extension piece 2687. It is possible to make it bounce, and to surely exert a deceleration effect or the like due to the bending of the extending piece 2687.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 180. FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the back unit is disassembled, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example includes a back box 621 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600 and has an open front side, and has a rear wall 621b in which an opening 621c that faces the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed. A game ball mounted near the front face in the box 621 and received in the first starting port 2101, the general winning port 2201, the third starting port 2415, the upper out port 2403, and the second major winning port 2404 in the table unit 2000 is moved downward. A ball guiding unit 3100 for guiding to a predetermined position, a back-upper movable effect unit 3200 attached near the upper right corner above the opening 621c in the back box 621 and movable in accordance with the game state, and a back-upper movable effect unit A rear right movable production unit that is disposed below the right side of 3200 and on the right side of the opening 621c in the back box 621 on the right side and is movable according to the gaming state. 3400 and a transparent plate-shaped protective cover 3010 which is disposed at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction in the back box 621 and is substantially the same size as the opening 621c, and is disposed between the protective cover and the rear wall 621b of the back box 621. And a back-and-back movable production unit 3500 that can move according to the gaming state.

  The back unit 3000 is a panel relay board that is mounted on the rear surface of the rear wall 621b of the back box 621 at the lower left corner in rear view and relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the first count sensor 2128 of the front unit 2000, etc. 3012 and a first lamp driving board box 3016 that houses a first lamp driving board 3104 that is attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3012 in a rear view and controls a decorative board, a driving motor, and the like of the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000; A second lamp drive board that is mounted on the right side of the opening 621c in the back view and that houses a second lamp drive board 3018 that controls the decorative board, the drive motor, etc. of the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in cooperation with the first lamp drive board 3014. A box 3020 and a first lamp driving board 3014 attached to the upper right corner in rear view, An upper turning relay board that relays the connection between the two lamp driving board 3018 and the upper rear decoration board 3544 and the upper rear driving motor 3554 of the upper turning decoration unit 3540 and the upper turning driving unit 3550 in the back and rear movable rendering unit 3500. 3022 and a second attacker that is attached to the approximate center in the vertical direction on the right side of the opening 621c in the rear view and relays the connection between the panel relay board 3012 and the second attacker solenoid 2508, the second count sensor 2512, and the like of the second attacker unit 2500. A unit relay board 3024 and a lock member 3026 that is attached to the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left side of the opening 621c in the rear view and that holds the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a detachable manner on the rear surface of the back box 621.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a magnetic detection sensor 3028 attached to a position corresponding to the rear side of the first start port 2102 and the second start port 2102 of the first attacker unit in the back box 621.

  The back box 621 in the back unit 3000 has a ball guiding unit 3100, a back upper movable effect unit 3200, a rear right movable effect unit 3400, a rear rear movable effect unit 3500, and a panel relay board 3012 at appropriate positions before and after the rear wall 621b. , A first lamp driving board box 3016, a second lamp driving board box 3020, an upper turning relay board 3022, a second attacker unit relay board 3024, a mounting hole and a mounting boss for mounting the lock member 3026 and the like. Further, the back box 621 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 621a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 via the fixing portion 621a. Further, the back box 621 is disposed on the rear side of the rear wall 621b on the left side of the opening 621c as viewed from the rear side in the vertical direction, and has a mounting recess 621d into which the fixing piece 1402 protruding from the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is inserted. I have.

  Although not shown in detail, the rear box 621 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 621b of the back box 621 at the lower position of the upper turning relay board 3022, and the front end of the back box 621. A plate-like holding plate 3030 (see FIG. 178) formed of a material that can be extended and magnetized can be provided. This holding plate 3030 is magnetically attached to the holding magnet 3547 of the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 when the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 described later is swung upward. When the swivel decoration unit 3540 is held in the retracted position, the load applied to the rear rear upper drive motor 3554 can be reduced.

[2-6A. Ball guidance unit]
Subsequently, the ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 183. FIG. 181 (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 181 (B) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear side. FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the front after disassembling each main member. Moreover, FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear after disassembling the main members.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 as a whole has a liquid crystal display device 1400 (opening 621c in the back box 621) so as not to interfere with the effect image displayed on the rear liquid crystal display device 1400. It is a shape along the outer shape of. The ball guiding unit 3100 is a horizontally long upper ball guiding member that extends from the position corresponding to the rear side of the upper outlet 2403 in the front unit 2000 to the left side of the left end of the opening 621c in the back box 621 in the left direction when viewed from the front. 3102 and extending downward from the left end of the upper sphere guiding member 3102 to the substantially lower end of the opening 621c in the back box 621, and then extending obliquely downward toward the same horizontal position as the right end of the upper sphere guiding member 3102. And a lower crank guiding member 3104 having a variable crank shape that hangs downward.

  The sphere guiding unit 3100 includes a right sphere guiding member 3106 disposed on the right side of the lower sphere guiding member 3104 in a front view, and a right sphere guiding member 3106 on the opposite side of the lower sphere guiding member 3104 with the lower part interposed therebetween. A left sphere guiding member 3108 disposed on the left side in front view and a plate-like back cover 3110 attached to the lower rear side of the lower sphere guiding member 3104 are further provided.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the upper ball guiding member 3102 and attached to the back upper left decorative substrate 3112 capable of irradiating light forward, and a predetermined distance from the rear side of the lower ball guiding member 3104. The back left decorative board 3114 that can irradiate light forward and the back left side decoration that is arranged between the back left decorative board 3114 and the lower ball guiding member 3104 and can irradiate light rightward in front view. A board 3116, a first lamp driving board 3014, a second lamp driving board 3018, a back upper decoration board 3112, a back left decoration board 3114, a back left side decoration board 3116, etc. And a lower left relay board 3118 for relaying the connection.

  The ball guiding unit 3100 is attached to the right sphere guiding member 3106 and detects a game ball received by the first starting port 2101. The first starting port sensor 3120 is attached to the left sphere guiding member 3108 and is a general winning port 2201. And a general prize opening sensor 3122 for detecting a game ball accepted by the player.

  The upper sphere guiding member 3102 in the sphere guiding unit 3100 is open at the front side, extends from the rear side position of the discharge hole 2452c in the center main body 2450 of the table unit 2000 to the left in the front view, and hangs slightly downward on the left end side. A discharge passage 3102a and a ball discharge port 3102b (see FIG. 183) that opens to the rear side of the lower left end of the upper ball discharge passage 3102a and allows a game ball to pass therethrough are provided. The upper ball guiding member 3102 guides the game ball received in the upper out port 2403 of the front unit 2000 to the left in front view through the upper ball discharge passage 3102a, and plays the game ball from the ball discharge port 3102b to the lower ball guiding member 3104. Can be delivered.

  Further, the lower ball guiding member 3104 in the ball guiding unit 3100 has an upper right opening 3104a that opens to the upper end facing the right side when viewed from the front and allows a game ball to pass therethrough, and a game ball that has entered from the upper right opening 3140a. A lower ball discharge passage 3104b that is guided to the lower end along the guide member 3104 and opened at the rear side; a lower opening 3104c that opens downward at the lower end of the lower ball discharge passage 3104b and allows a game ball to pass; An upper front opening 3104d that opens forward and allows a game ball to pass through on the lower side of the right opening 3104a and on the left side when viewed from the front, and a game ball that has entered from the upper front opening 3104d are guided into the lower ball discharge passage 3104b. And an upper communication passage 3104e whose rear side is open.

  Further, the lower ball guiding member 3104 extends from the upper end of the lower portion extending in the vertical direction to the right in front view and opens upward to allow the game ball to pass therethrough, and the lower upper opening 3104f. And a lower communication passage 3104g that guides the entered game ball to the lower ball discharge passage 3104b and is opened on the rear side. The lower ball guiding member 3104 also includes a sensor mounting portion 3104h to which a game ball detection sensor can be mounted so that a game ball flowing in the lower communication passage 3104g can be detected.

  The lower ball guiding member 3104 is disposed at a position where the upper right opening 3104a faces the discharge port 2554j of the warp passage unit 2550 in the center accessory 2400, and the game ball received in the second big winning port 2404 is discharged. It enters from the upper right opening 3104a through the exit 2554j. The lower sphere guide member 3104 is disposed at a position where the upper front opening 3104d faces the sphere discharge port 3102b of the upper sphere guide member 3102. A game ball received in the big prize opening 2404 enters from the upper front opening 3104d.

  Further, the lower ball guiding member 3104 is disposed at a position where the lower upper opening 3104 f faces the lower end opening of the guide passage 2602 g in the drive stage unit 2600 of the center accessory 2400, and is disposed on the stage 2410 of the center accessory 2400. The game ball received in the third starting port 2415 thus made enters from the lower upper opening 3104f through the guide passage 2602g.

  The lower ball guiding member 3104 guides the game ball that has entered from the upper right opening 3104a, the upper front opening 3104d, and the lower upper opening 3104f to the substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction in the back unit 3000 through the lower ball discharge passage 3104b. It can discharge | emit below from lower opening 3104c of a lower end.

  The lower sphere discharge passage 3104b whose rear side in the lower sphere guiding member 3104 is opened is closed at the lower part by the back cover 3110 and at the upper part by the protective cover 3010 at the upper part from the back cover 3110. .

  The right sphere guiding member 3106 in the sphere guiding unit 3100 has an upper opening 3106a that opens to the left in the front view to allow the game ball to pass therethrough, and a game ball that has entered from the upper opening 3106a toward the lower right in the front view. A right sphere discharge passage 3106b that is guided in a crank shape and opened on the front side, and a lower end opening 3106c that opens downward at the lower end of the right sphere discharge passage 3106b and allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  The right sphere guiding member 3106 is configured such that the upper opening 3106a faces the downstream end of the first guiding portion 2123a communicating with the first starting port 2101 in the first attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000. A game ball received in the mouth 2101 enters the right sphere discharge passage 3106b from the upper opening 3106a through the first guide portion 2123a, and discharges downward from the lower end opening 3106c at the lower end through the right sphere discharge passage 3106b. Can be done. The right sphere guide member 3106 has a first start port sensor 3120 attached to a predetermined position in the right sphere discharge passage 3106b so that a game ball received in the first start port 2101 can be detected. It has become.

  As shown in the drawing, the left sphere guiding member 3108 in the ball guiding unit 3100 allows a game ball to pass through and extends in the vertical direction and is opened at the front side, and the left first discharge passage 3108a, second left from the left in front view. There are three discharge passages, a discharge passage 3108b and a left third discharge passage 3108c. Further, the left sphere guide member 3108 has a form in which the left first discharge passage 3108a and the left second discharge passage 3108b are merged at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. The lower left opening 3108d made possible, and the lower right opening 3108e opened downward at the lower end of the left third discharge passage 3108c to allow the game ball to pass therethrough are provided.

  In the left sphere guide member 3108, the upper ends of the left first discharge passage 3108a, the left second discharge passage 3108b, and the left third discharge passage 3108c are respectively connected to the three general winning ports 2201 in the side decorative member 2200 of the front unit 2000. The rear end of the corresponding collar 2202b is opposed to the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 and enters the respective discharge passages, and enters from the lower left opening 3108d or the lower right opening 3108e at the lower end. It can be discharged downward.

  The left sphere guide member 3108 includes an upstream left first discharge passage 3108a where the left first discharge passage 3108a and the left second discharge passage 3108b merge, and the left first discharge passage 3108a and the second left discharge. A general winning opening sensor 3122 is attached to each of the downstream discharge passage where the passage 3108b merges and the left third discharge passage 3108c to detect a game ball received in the general winning opening 2201. In addition, it is possible to know which general winning opening 2201 has been accepted.

  In the sphere guide unit 3100 of this example, an upper sphere guide member 3102, a lower sphere guide member 3104, a right sphere guide member 3106, a left sphere guide member 3108, and a back cover 3110 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

[2-6B. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 184 to 187. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable movable effect unit as seen from the front after disassembling the back top front unit and the back top rear unit. Further, FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable movable effect unit, which is disassembled into a rear upper front unit and a rear upper rear unit and is viewed from the rear.

  This back movable movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the right side of the second big prize opening 2404 (second attacker unit 2500) in the game area 605 in front view (see FIG. 148, etc.). This back-side movable production unit 3200 is arranged on the front side and has a back-front front unit 3210 having two decorated characters, and is located on the back side of the back-top front unit 3210 and is based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 in the center in the left-right direction. And a rear rear unit 3300 having a figure imitating a predetermined character along.

[2-6B-1. Back top unit]
Next, the front front unit 3210 in the back movable production unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 188 to 192. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view in which the front front unit in the back movable production unit is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is a rear view in which the back front unit is disassembled for each main member. FIG. FIG. 190 is a front view of the front upper unit. FIG. 191 is a cross-sectional view of the back-up front unit taken along line AA in FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the front back unit 3210 in the back upper movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the left side when viewed from the front and has a logo left decorative member 3220 on which a large “song” character is formed, and a right side of the logo left decorative member 3220. The logo right decorative member 3230 in which the characters “Princess” are largely formed, and the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 are arranged behind the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230. And a logo driving unit 3240 for moving up and down.

  The front back unit 3210 can be driven to move up and down independently by the logo drive unit 3240 along the axis extending slightly diagonally to the lower left of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230. It has become.

  The logo left decorative member 3220 in the back front unit 3210 includes a logo left decorative main body 3221 in which characters of “song” are three-dimensionally shaped and a relief-like decoration is applied and has translucency. A plate-shaped logo left base 3222 (see FIG. 191) attached to the rear side of 3221, a vertically long and translucent lens member 3223 attached to the right end of the logo left base 3222, the lens member 3223 and the logo left And a logo left decorative substrate 3224 which is disposed on the rear side of the base 3222 and can emit light forward.

  Further, the logo left decorative member 3220 is attached to the rear left end of the logo left base 3222 and extends obliquely in the vertical direction and has a rack gear 3225a exposed on the right side in front view, and parallel to the rack gear 3225a of the rack member 3225. A rail member 3226 attached to the rear side of the right end of the extended logo left base 3222, and a holding plate 3227 formed of a metal plate attached to the logo left base 3222 below the rack member 3225 and magnetized. Yes.

  The logo left decorative board 3224 of the logo left decorative member 3220 is arranged in a diagonally up and down direction at a position corresponding to the lens member 3223 and a plurality of color LEDs 3224a on the front surface corresponding to the character of “Song”. A plurality of high-intensity LEDs 3224b that are capable of being mounted (see FIG. 190). The rack member 3225 includes a detection piece 3225b extending rearward from the upper end and a rail portion 3225c extending leftward from the rear end. Although not shown in detail, the logo left decorative member 3220 includes a sheet-like diffusion lens member that diffuses light from the logo left decorative substrate 3224 on the front side of the logo left base 3222.

  On the other hand, the logo right decorative member 3230 in the back front unit 3210 includes a logo right decorative main body 3231 in which characters of “princess” are three-dimensionally shaped and a relief-like decoration is applied and has translucency. A plate-like logo right base 3232 (see FIG. 191) attached to the rear side of the decoration main body 3231; a logo right decoration substrate 3234 arranged on the rear side of the logo right base 3232 and capable of emitting light forward; A rack member 3235 having a rack gear 3235a (see FIG. 191) attached to the rear right side of the logo right base 3232 and extending obliquely in the vertical direction and exposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and the logo right extending in parallel with the rack gear 3235a of the rack member 3235 A rail member 3236 attached to the rear left side of the base 3232 and a logo right base 3232 below the rack member 3235 are attached. And vignetting magnetically attached capable metal plate holding plate 3237 formed by, and a.

  The logo right decoration board 3234 of the logo right decoration member 3230 has a plurality of color LEDs 3234a mounted on the front surface at a position corresponding to the characters “Princess” (see FIG. 190). The rack member 3235 includes a detection piece 3235b extending rearward from the upper end and a rail portion 3235c extending rightward from the rear end. Although not shown in detail, the logo right decorative member 3230 includes a sheet-like diffusion lens member that diffuses light from the logo right decorative substrate 3234 on the front side of the logo right base 3232.

  The logo driving unit 3240 in the front front unit 3210 includes a transparent logo driving base 3242 and a front surface of the logo driving base 3242 which is attached to the left end of the front view and extends obliquely in the vertical direction. The left guide member 3244 for guiding the left side surface and the rail portion 3225b, and the logo left decorative member 3220 guided by the left guide member 3244 mesh with the rack gear 3225a of the rack member 3225 and can be rotated at the lower right position of the left guide member 3244. , A logo left drive motor 3248 attached to the rear side of the logo drive base 3242, and a logo drive base corresponding to the vicinity of the upper end of the left guide member 3244. 3242 logo attached on the back side And a, a logo left position detection sensor 3250 capable of detecting the detection piece 3225b of rack member 3225 in wood 3220.

  The logo driving unit 3240 is attached to the right end of the front of the logo driving base 3242 and extends obliquely in the vertical direction in parallel with the left guide member 3244, and the right side surface of the rack member 3235 and the rail portion 3235b in the logo right decoration member 3230. A right guide member 3252 that guides the gear, and a gear that meshes with a rack gear 3235a of the rack member 3235 in the logo right decorative member 3230 guided by the right guide member 3252 and that is rotatably supported at a lower left position of the right guide member 3252. 3254, a logo right drive motor 3256 having a drive gear 3254 fixed to the rotary shaft and attached to the rear side of the logo drive base 3242, and attached to the rear side of the logo drive base 3242 corresponding to the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide member 3252. The rack member 32 in the right logo decorative member 3230 5 of the detection piece 3235b capable of detecting the logo right position detection sensor 3258, and a.

  Further, the logo driving unit 3240 is attached to a position corresponding to the vicinity of the lower ends of the left guide member 3244 and the right guide member 3252 in the logo drive base 3242, and holds the holding plate 3227 of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230. A holding magnet 3259 that can be magnetically attached to the plate 3237 is provided.

  The logo drive base 3242 of the logo drive unit 3240 is disposed on the front surface at the lower end in the substantially horizontal direction, and guides the rail member 3226 of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the rail member 3236 of the logo right decorative member 3230, respectively. It has. Although not shown in detail, the logo drive base 3242 is provided with slits extending obliquely in the vertical direction along the right side of the left guide member 3244 and the left side of the right guide member 3252, respectively. The detection pieces 3225c and 3235c of the rack members 3225 and 3235 extend to the rear side of the logo drive base 3242 through the slits, and can be detected by the logo left position detection sensor 3250 and the logo right position detection sensor 3258. .

  Further, the left guide member 3244 and the right guide member 3252 of the logo drive unit 3240 are in contact with the side surfaces of the rack members 3225 and 3235 of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 and can be rolled. The logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 can be smoothly guided.

  The back top front unit 3210 in the back top movable effect unit 3200 of the present example guides the rail portion 3225c of the rack member 3225 in the logo left decorative member 3220 to the left guide member 3244 of the logo drive unit 3240, and the logo left decorative member. By guiding the rail member 3226 of the 3220 to the rail guide part 3242a of the logo drive base 3242 of the logo drive unit 3240, the logo left decorative member 3220 is slidably held along an axis extending slightly diagonally to the lower left. In this state, by driving the logo left drive motor 3248 and rotating the drive gear 3246, the logo left decorative member 3220 is moved up and down via the rack gear 3225a meshed with the drive gear 3246. Can be done.

  Further, the back front unit 3210 guides the rail portion 3235c of the rack member 3235 in the logo right decorative member 3230 to the right guide member 3252 of the logo drive unit 3240, and moves the rail member 3236 of the logo right decorative member 3230 to the logo. By guiding the logo guide base 3242 of the drive unit 3240 to the rail guide portion 3242a, the logo right decorative member 3230 can be slidably held along an axis extending slightly diagonally to the lower left. In this state, by driving the logo right drive motor 3256 to rotate the drive gear 3254, the logo right decoration member 3230 can be moved up and down via the rack gear 3235a meshed with the drive gear 3254.

  Further, the front upper unit 3210 has a lens member 3223 of the logo left decorative member 3220 positioned on the left side of the logo right decorative body 3230, and the three-dimensionally shaped “song” and “princess” It is in a state of being placed between.

  When the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 are raised (the raised position), the rear upper front unit 3210 has holding plates 3227 and 3237 respectively provided as magnets for holding the logo driving unit 3240. The logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 are held in the raised position by the magnetic force of the holding magnet 3259, and the load applied to the logo left drive motor 3248 and the logo right drive motor 3256 is increased. It can be reduced.

[2-6B-2. Rear rear unit]
Next, the back rear unit 3300 in the back movable production unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 200. FIG. 192 is a front view of the back rear unit in the back movable production unit. FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the back-up rear unit as viewed obliquely from the lower front. FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the back-up rear unit taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 195 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear unit as seen from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 197 is an explanatory diagram showing the seesaw mechanism in the rear rear unit from the front. FIG. 198 is an explanatory view showing the effect ball rotation mechanism in the rear rear unit from the front.

  The back rear unit 3300 in the back movable production unit 3200 of this example has a plurality of (in this example, five) production balls 3301 having the same shape as the game balls (see FIG. 198 etc.). A movable effect using the sphere 3301 can be performed. As shown in the figure, the rear rear unit 3300 is arranged at the approximate center of the front view and is arranged at the lower front character body 3302 simulating a predetermined character of the pachinko machine 1 and the front lower portion of the rear upper character body 3302 in the horizontal direction. And a seesaw member 3303 that is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center in the left-right direction, and a seesaw member 3303 is rotatably supported. And a sorting base 3304 that supports the back upper character body 3302 from the rear side.

  In the rear rear unit 3300, the rear upper character body 3302 has a seesaw member 3303 on the front side of the distribution base 3304. The seesaw member 3303 is curved at the left and right ends, and has an opening 3303a through which the effect balls 3301 can pass on the rear side of the left and right ends, so that the effect balls 3301 can be emitted from both the left and right ends. It has become. The seesaw member 3303 includes a cylindrical bearing portion 3303b that protrudes rearward from the center in the left-right direction, and a distribution shaft 3312, which will be described later, is inserted from the rear side.

  The sorting base 3304 of the rear rear unit 3300 has a plurality of decorative portions formed with a geometric pattern in a relief shape on the front surface, and a character for attaching the back upper character body 3302 to the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A body attachment portion 3304a and a cylindrical bearing boss portion 3304b that protrudes forward from the lower portion of the character body attachment portion 3304a and supports the seesaw member 3303 are provided. Further, the sorting base 3304 has a position corresponding to the open portions 3303a on the left and right ends of the seesaw member 3303 rotated slightly on the left and right sides of the bearing boss portion 3304b, and the seesaw member 3303 on the left side of the character body mounting portion 3304a. And three through-holes 3304c that are larger in diameter than the effect ball 3301 and penetrate in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the sorting base 3304 extends from the lower end to the front and has a receiving shelf portion 3304d whose left and right ends rise, and a central opening 3304e that is formed at a position on the upper center in the left-right direction of the receiving shelf portion 3304d and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And. In the distribution base 3304, two through holes 3304c below the bearing boss 3304b are formed at positions corresponding to a lower left opening 3321c and a lower right opening 3321d in a rotation base 3321 described later. The central opening 3304e of the distribution base 3304 is formed at a position corresponding to the lower middle opening 3321b of the rotation base 3321. Note that the distribution base 3304 of this example is formed to have translucency.

  The rear rear unit 3300 is attached to the front surface of the sorting base 3304 at a position above the receiving shelf 3304d and below the through hole 3304c in the sorting base 3304 so as to straddle the left and right through holes 3304c of the bearing boss portion 3304b. And a transparent plate-like collection stage 3305 that extends in the left-right direction and extends forward and is inclined toward the central opening 3304e of the sorting base 3304. Further, the rear rear unit 3300 has a left portal 3306 that decorates the front outer periphery of the through hole 3304c on the left side of the bearing boss portion 3304b and a right outer surface that decorates the front outer periphery of the through hole 334c on the right side of the bearing boss portion 3304b. A portal 3307 and a sorting decoration board 3308 arranged on the rear side of the sorting base 3304 and capable of irradiating light forward are provided.

  Further, the rear rear unit 3300 includes a seesaw mechanism 3310 for swinging the seesaw member 3303 in a seesaw shape and releasing the effect ball 3301 supplied on the seesaw member 3303 from either the left or right side. The seesaw mechanism 3310 in the rear rear unit 3300 is disposed in the rear side of the sorting decoration board 3308 and is formed in a thin box shape with the rear side opened, and a seesaw mechanism box 3311 that accommodates a part of the seesaw mechanism 3310; A distribution shaft 3312 that passes through the seesaw mechanism box 3311 and the distribution base 3304 and is inserted into and fixed to the bearing portion 3303b of the seesaw member 3303 and pivotally supported by the bearing boss portion 334b of the distribution base 3304; A distribution gear 3313 that is fixed to the rear end of the shaft 3312 and that is fan-shaped around the axis of the distribution shaft 3312 and has a plurality of teeth on the outer periphery, and a distribution drive gear 3314 that meshes with the distribution gear 3313. The distribution drive gear 3314 to be rotated and attached to the rear side of the rotation base 3321 to be described later. A motor 3315, and a sorting position detection sensor 3316 for detecting the rotational position of the seesaw member 3303 attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3321, a.

  The distribution gear 3313 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3313a extending outward from the upper side surface, and the detection piece 3313a is detected by the distribution position detection sensor 3316, whereby the distribution gear 3313 is interposed. The rotation position of the seesaw member 3303 can be detected. As shown in FIG. 197, the detection of the detection piece 3313a of the distribution gear 3313 by the distribution position detection sensor 3316 is detected or not detected. At the switching position, the seesaw member 3303 is in a substantially horizontal state. The seesaw mechanism box 3311 of the seesaw mechanism 3310 is attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3321. In this example, a seesaw member 3303 is also included in the seesaw mechanism 3310 that distributes the effect ball 3301 to either the left or right.

  The seesaw mechanism 3310 of the rear upper unit 3300 has a seesaw member 3303 so that the left end of the seesaw mechanism 3303 is lowered via the sorting gear 3313 when the sorting drive gear 3314 is rotated clockwise in front view by the sorting drive motor 3315. And the seesaw member 3303 so that the right end is lowered via the distribution gear 3313 when the distribution drive gear 3314 is rotated counterclockwise by the distribution drive motor 3315. Can be tilted.

  In this seesaw mechanism 3310, when the seesaw member 3303 is rotated by about 15 ° from the horizontal state in the direction of lowering the left side when viewed from the front, the left end opening 3303a opens the front end opening of the left collection passage 3329a in the ball collection passage member 3329 described later. The effect ball 3301 on the seesaw member 3303 can be connected to the left collection passage 3329a side, and can enter the left portal 3306. On the other hand, when the seesaw member 3303 is rotated by about 15 ° from the horizontal state in a direction where the right side is lowered, the open end 3303a at the right end coincides with the front end opening of the right collection passage 3329b in the ball collection passage member 3329. The effect ball 3301 on the seesaw member 3303 can be connected to the right collection passage 3329b side and enter the right portal 3307.

  If the effect ball 3301 supplied on the seesaw member 3303 does not enter either the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307, it falls to the collection stage 3305 disposed below the seesaw member 3303 and is collected. It is sent from the center of the stage 3305 to the middle collection passage 3329c of the ball collection passage member 3329 that faces the central opening 3304e of the sorting base 3304.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the front end of the distribution shaft 3312 is inserted into the bearing portion 3303b of the seesaw member 3303, and a fixing screw 3317 passing through the bearing portion 3303b is screwed in from the lower side, so that the seesaw The member 3303 is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable. The collection stage 3305 has an insertion hole 3305a through which a tool such as a screwdriver for rotating the fixing screw 3317 can be inserted immediately below a position where the fixing screw 3317 for fixing the sorting shaft 3312 to the seesaw member 3303 is attached. The seesaw member 3303 and the sorting shaft 3312 can be fixed from below with a fixing screw 3317. As shown in FIG. 194, the insertion hole 3305a of the collection stage 3305 is formed so that the front side of the inner wall extends in the vertical direction. A tool such as a driver can be guided by the inner wall, and the fixing screw 3317 The attachment / detachment work can be facilitated.

  Further, the rear rear unit 3300 includes an effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 for supplying and collecting the effect ball 3301 to the seesaw mechanism 3310. The production ball rotation mechanism 3320 in the rear upper unit 3300 includes a rotation base 3321 attached to the rear surface of the sorting base 3304 on the rear side of the seesaw mechanism 3310, a rotation gear cover 3322 attached to the rear side of the rotation base 3321, Both ends are rotatably supported by the rotation base 3321 and the rotation gear cover 3322, and the rotation shaft 3323 extending in the front-rear direction, and fixed between the rotation shaft 3323 and disposed between the rotation base 3321 and the rotation gear cover 3322. The rotary case 3324 having a disc shape and having a plurality of gear teeth 3324a on the outer periphery and capable of conveying the effect ball 3301, and the gear teeth 3324a of the rotary case 3324 mesh with the rotary case 3324a. A rotation drive gear 3325, and a rotation drive motor 3326 is attached to the rear side of the rotation gear cover 3322 is driven to rotate the rotation driving gear 3325, a.

  When the rotation driving gear 3325 is rotationally driven by the rotation driving motor 3326, the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 is a shaft in which the rotary case 3324 extends in the front-rear direction by the gear teeth 3324a on the outer periphery of the rotary case 3324 engaged with the rotation driving gear 3325. It is designed to rotate around.

  In addition to the gear teeth 3324a formed on the outer periphery, a plurality of (in this example, five) rotary cases 3324 of the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface along the circumferential direction, as illustrated. , A ball housing recess 3324b that can house only one recess effect ball 3301 is provided. The rotary case 3324 is arranged in the circumferential direction so that five sphere receiving recesses 3324b are adjacent to each other, an axis extending from the center of the sphere receiving recess 3324b on one end side to the rotation center, and a sphere on the other end side. An axis extending from the center of the housing recess 3324b to the center of rotation intersects at an angle of 120 °. That is, each sphere receiving recess 3324b is formed at an angle of 30 ° with respect to the rotation center.

  The spherical housing recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324 is inclined so that the inner wall on the rotation center side becomes closer to the rotation center side as it goes forward (FIG. 194). As a result, when the ball housing recess 3324b in which the rotary case 3324 is rotated moves upward from the center of rotation, the effect ball 3301 housed in the ball housing recess 3324b can be rolled forward by the inclined inner wall. It has become.

  Further, the rotation base 3321 of the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotary case 3324 via the rotation shaft 3323 in cooperation with the rotation gear cover 3322 at a substantially central position. doing. The rotation base 3321 includes an upper opening 3321a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the ball housing recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324 directly above the rotation shaft 3323, and the upper opening 3321a is a rotation axis. A lower middle opening 3321b that penetrates in the front-rear direction to a position corresponding to the ball housing recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324 on the lower side opposite to the opposite side of the 3323, a left middle of the lower middle opening 3321b, and a rotation shaft The lower left opening 3321c through which the effect ball 3301 can pass through the position corresponding to the ball receiving recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324 below the 3323 and the lower left opening 3321c is opposite with the rotation shaft 3323 interposed therebetween. Rotary case 3 on the right side Directing sphere 3301 through the longitudinal direction in the corresponding position comprises a lower right opening 3321d can pass, the 24 spheres housing recess 3324B.

  The production ball rotation mechanism 3320 has the front surface of the rotary case 3324 closed by a rotation base 3321. The rotation of the rotation base 3321 is from other than the upper opening 3321a, the lower middle opening 3321b, the lower left opening 3321c, and the lower right opening 3321d. The effect sphere 3301 is prevented from entering and exiting the ball housing recess 3324b of the case 3324.

  The rotation base 3321 has an axis extending from the center of the lower left opening 3321c to the axis of the rotation shaft 3323 and an axis extending from the center of the lower right opening 3321d to the axis of the rotation shaft 3323 at an angle of 120 °. It is formed to intersect. In the rotation base 3321, the lower left opening 3321 c and the lower right opening 3321 d correspond to the two through holes 3304 c below the bearing boss portion 3304 b in the distribution base 3304, and the lower middle opening 3321 d is the center of the distribution base 3304. It corresponds to the opening 3304e.

  The effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 is attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3321 and guides the effect ball 3301 discharged to the front side from the upper opening 3321a to the left, and then guides the effect ball 3301 to the front side of the sorting base 3304 and A ball supply port member 3328 that covers the upper side of the portion for guiding the effect ball 3301 forward in the ball supply passage member 3327 and drops the effect ball 3301 guided by the ball supply passage member 3327 onto the lower seesaw member 3303; The effect ball 3301 supplied from the ball supply port member 3328 to the seesaw member 3303 side and released from the seesaw member 3303 is moved from the front side of the sorting base 3304 to the lower middle opening 3321b, the lower left opening 3321c, and the lower right opening from the rotation base 3321. Guide to 3321d and rotate A ball return passage member 3329 attached to the front of the scan 3321, and a.

  The ball supply passage member 3327 is formed such that a portion for guiding the effect ball 3301 forward is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 3304c above the bearing boss portion 3304b in the distribution base 3304, and covers the upper side. Together with the member 3328, it extends from the rear side of the sorting base 3304 to the front side of the sorting base 3304 through the through hole 3304c (see FIG. 193 and the like).

  Further, the ball collection passage member 3329 passes through the left through-hole 3304c below the bearing boss 3304b in the sorting base 3304 from the rear side, protrudes forward from the left portal 3306, and the rear end rotates to the rotation base. A cylindrical left recovery passage 3329a that faces the front surface of the lower left opening 3321c of 3321 and through which the production ball 3301 can circulate, and a through hole 3304c on the right side below the bearing boss portion 3304b in the distribution base 3304, penetrates from the rear side. Then, the front end of the right portal 3307 protrudes forward, the rear end faces the front of the lower right opening 3321d of the rotation base 3321, and the cylindrical right collection passage 3329b through which the effect ball 3301 can circulate, and the front end of the sorting base 3304. Facing the central opening 3304e and the rear end of the lower middle opening 3321 of the rotation base 3321 Directing balls 3301 faces the front is provided with a recovery passage 3329c in the tubular possible distribution.

  The ball collection passage member 3329 is inclined such that the left collection passage 3329a, the right collection passage 3329b, and the middle collection passage 3329c are lowered toward the rear (see FIG. 194). Can be guided to the rear side.

  Further, the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position on the right side of the upper opening 3321a on the front surface of the rotation base 3321 and on the right side of the rotary case 3324, and has a tip end. A horizontally long shutter member 3330 extending to the front surface of the upper opening 3321a, and the position of the front end of the shutter member 3330 (closed position) and the position above the upper opening 3321a (open position). And a shutter solenoid 3331 that rotates the shutter member 3330 so as to move between them.

  The effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 is configured such that the shutter member 3330 engages with the distal end of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the shutter solenoid 3331 at a position on the upper left side of the position where the shutter member 3330 is pivotally supported. In this state (when the shutter solenoid 3331 is not energized), the plunger of the shutter solenoid 3331 moves forward, and the tip of the shutter member 3330 is positioned in front of the upper opening 3321a and the upper opening 3321a is closed. (See FIG. 198). When the shutter solenoid 3331 is driven electrostatically to retract the plunger in the right direction, the tip of the shutter member 3330 is rotated in the ascending direction, and the upper opening 3321a is opened.

  The effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 of this example has an arc-shaped slit 3330a centered on the rotation center of the shutter member 3330, and a protruding boss 3321e inserted into the slit 3330a of the shutter member on the rotation base 3321. The projecting boss 3321e is in contact with the end of the slit 3330a so that the moving end of the shutter member 3330 is regulated. A holding member 3332 having a larger diameter than the slit 3330a of the shutter member 3330 is attached to the front end of the protruding boss 3321e in the rotation base 3321 so that the slit 3330a of the shutter member 3330 cannot be removed from the protruding boss 3321e. ing.

  Further, the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 is attached to the front of the lower left opening 3321c in the rotation base 3321 and the supply detection sensor 3333 that detects the effect ball 3301 that circulates in the ball supply passage member 3327, and the left of the ball recovery passage member 3329. The left recovery detection sensor 3334 that detects the effect ball 3301 that has circulated through the recovery passage 3329a, and the effect ball 3301 that is attached to the front surface of the lower right opening 3321d of the rotation base 3321 and that has passed through the right recovery passage 3329b of the ball recovery passage member 3329 are detected. A right recovery detection sensor 3335, and a middle recovery detection sensor 3336 that detects an effect ball 3301 that is attached to the front surface of the lower middle opening 3321b of the rotation base 3321 and flows through the middle recovery passage 3329c of the ball recovery passage member 3329. There. These detection sensors 3333, 3334, 3335, 3336 can monitor the entry / exit of the production ball 3301 from the rotary case 3324.

  The effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 includes a rotation position detection sensor 3338 that detects the rotation position of the rotary case 3324 via a mounting bracket 3337 on the rear side of the rotation gear cover 3322. By detecting the detection slit 3324c formed on the rear side of the rotary case 3324, the rotational position of the rotary case 3324 (specifically, the rotational position of the central ball housing recess 3324a) can be detected. Yes.

  Further, the rear rear unit 3300 is attached to the right front surface of the rotation base 3321 and includes a sorting decoration board 3308, a sorting drive motor 3315, a sorting position detection sensor 3316, a rotation driving motor 3326, a shutter solenoid 3331, and a supply detection sensor. 3333, the left collection detection sensor 3334, the right collection detection sensor 3335, the middle collection detection sensor 3336, the rotation position detection sensor 3338, and the back behind the connection of the first lamp drive board 3014 and the second lamp drive board 3018 A unit relay board 3339 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 198, the production ball rotation mechanism 3320 of the rear upper unit 3300 is in a state where the production balls 3301 are housed one by one in the five ball housing recesses 3324 b in the rotary case 3324 in the normal state. In addition, when the rotary case 3324 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the ball receiving recess 3324b on the leading side is positioned to coincide with the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321. Further, in this state, the tip of the shutter member 3330 is positioned in front of the upper opening 3321a, so that the effect ball 3301 in the ball housing recess 3324b does not roll forward through the upper opening 3321a. It has become.

  In the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320, when the shutter solenoid 3331 is energized and driven from the normal state described above, the shutter member 3330 rotates in the direction in which the tip of the shutter member 3330 moves upward (clockwise in front view), and the head The production ball 3301 in the side ball housing recess 3321a passes through the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321 and is supplied to the front ball supply passage member 3327, via the ball supply passage member 3327 and the ball supply port member 3328. It can be dropped and supplied onto a seesaw member 3303 disposed on the front side of the sorting base 3304.

  Further, in the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320, when the supply of the game ball is detected by the supply detection sensor 3333 disposed in the ball supply passage member 3327, the energization drive of the shutter solenoid 3331 is stopped, and the tip of the shutter member 3330 is moved. The shutter member 3330 rotates in a descending direction (counterclockwise in front view) so that the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321 is closed by the tip of the shutter member 3330, and then the rotation drive motor 3326 is moved. The rotary case 3324 is rotated about 30 ° in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the rotation drive gear 3325, and the next ball receiving recess 3321 b containing the effect ball 3301 is formed with the upper opening 3321 a of the rotation base 3321. Stop with matching And, so that a state with the supply of the next effect sphere 3301.

  By the way, after the stage ball 3301 that is supplied to the seesaw member 3303 through the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321 and the ball supply passage member 3327 and the ball supply port member 3328 is discharged from the seesaw member 3303 as described above. The left portal 3306, the right portal 3308, or the ball collection stage 3305 is sent to the front side of any one of the lower middle opening 3321b, the lower left opening 3321c, and the lower right opening 3321d in the rotation base 3321 through the ball collection passage member 3329. It will be. At this time, the lower middle opening 3321b, the lower left opening 3321c, and the lower right opening 3321d are in a state where the rear side is closed by the front surface of the rotary case 3324, and the sent effect ball 3301 is opened 3321b, 3321c, 3321d. It comes to stop at the front side.

  When the effect ball 3301 supplied to the seesaw member 3303 side is collected, the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 drives the rotary case 3324 in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) by driving the rotation drive motor 3326. The effect ball 3301 supplied by the rotation can be collected in the ball housing recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324. Specifically, by rotating the rotary case 3324, when the empty ball receiving recess 3324b coincides with the lower left opening 3321c, the lower middle opening 3321b, and the lower right opening 3321d, the front is stopped by the front surface of the rotary case 3324. The produced effect ball 3301 enters the empty ball housing recess 3324b, and the effect ball 3301 can be collected.

  In the effect ball rotation mechanism 3320 of this example, the five ball receiving recesses 3324b formed in the rotary case 3324 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other within an angle range of 120 °. Is rotated toward the seesaw member 3303, the rotation case 3324 is rotated by 240 ° from the state (the state in which the rearmost ball receiving recess 3324b coincides with the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321), and the leading ball receiving recess is formed. When 3324a is matched with the upper opening 3321a, all the production balls 3301 can be collected into the ball housing recess 3324b, and four production balls 3301 can be collected with as little rotation as possible.

[2-6B-3. About the movable production of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the movable effect by the back movable effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200. FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back front unit in the back movable production unit. FIG. 200 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear rear unit in the rear movable production unit. This back-side movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and on the right side of the second big prize opening 2404 (see FIG. 148, etc.), and the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, and Various movable effects can be performed according to a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball in the third start port 2415.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (A) and the like, the back upper movable effect unit 3200 of this example has both the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 of the back upper front unit 3210 raised. In this state, the back character body 3302 of the back top rear unit 3300 disposed on the back side of the back top front unit 3210 is only partially visible from the player side. It has become. This allows the player to recognize that a figure is present behind the back front unit 3210, so that the entire front figure unit (back character body 3302) can be seen. It can be easily recalled that the 3210 is movable, and the expectation for the movement of the front upper unit 3210 (the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230) seems to suggest a chance by the complete appearance of the figure. The feeling can be enhanced.

  In the back movable production unit 3200, first, the logo left decorative member 3220 descends diagonally to the lower left by driving the logo left drive motor 3248 of the front front unit 3210 in accordance with the special lottery result (FIG. 199 (B )). As a result, the figure arranged on the rear side (the back upper character body 3302 of the back top rear unit 3300) can be further seen from the player side, and the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced. ing. Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, there may be a case where the movable effect is finished just by lowering the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo left decorative member 3220 is raised to return to the normal state.

  When the logo left decorative part 3220 of the front upper unit 3210 descends, the logo right decorative part 3230 descends diagonally to the lower left by driving the logo right drive motor 3256, and the figure ( The entire back upper character body 3302 and the seesaw member 3303) can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 199C). As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the arrival of the opportunity and enhance the interest, and at the same time, the seesaw member 3303 that the back character body 3302 has can be newly seen, and the rear side It is possible to make the player recognize that the placed figure is not just a decoration but another movable accessory (movable decoration), which can greatly surprise the player and move the new movable accessory It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Depending on the special lottery result, the movable effect may end here and return to the normal state.

  Incidentally, the logo left decorative member 3220 in the back front unit 3210 includes a plurality of LEDs 3224b arranged in the vertical direction on the rear side of the rightmost lens member 3223 (see FIG. 190), and the logo left decorative member 3220. When the player moves down, the LED 3224b sequentially emits light so that the player flows downward, so that the player can focus on the front upper unit 3210, and the right logo right decorative member 3230 descends continuously. It can be made to think that it is.

  When the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 of the front back front unit 3210 are lowered, the back top movable production unit 3200 in this example has a back top character in the back top rear unit 3300 arranged on the rear side. The body 330 and the seesaw member 3303 are in a state where they can be visually recognized from the player side. In this state, when the second big prize opening 2404 disposed on the left side of the back movable production unit 3200 is opened according to the special lottery result, and the game ball is received in the second big prize opening 2404. Then, the shutter solenoid 3331 of the rotation mechanism 3320 in the rear rear unit 3300 is driven to rotate the shutter member 3330, and the same as the game ball from the ball housing recess 3324b of the rotary case 3324 through the upper opening 3321a of the rotation base 3321. An effect ball 3301 is supplied onto the seesaw member 3303 (see FIG. 200A).

  This rear rear unit 3300 is arranged on the right side of the second grand prize opening 2404, and the game ball received in the second big prize opening 2404 is supplied to the seesaw member 3303 to the player. So that the illusion can be made. In addition, the rear rear unit 3300 circulates (rotates) the production ball 3301 housed inside and uses it for production, so the arrangement position is set without being restricted by the position of the second big prize opening 2404. Compared to the case where a game ball is used, foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the back-up rear unit 3300 through the game ball as a medium. Can be suppressed from occurring.

  When the production ball 3301 is supplied from the rotary case 3324 to the seesaw member 3303, the back rear unit 3300 repeats the forward / reverse rotation in a suitable pattern according to the special lottery result, so that the seesaw member 3303 is swung around the distributing shaft 3312, and the effect ball 3301 supplied on the seesaw member 3303 is reciprocated to the left and right along the seesaw member 3303. This makes it possible to make the player feel excited and entertained depending on which side of the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307 the stage ball 3301 rolling on the seesaw member 3303 is released. Be able to.

  For example, when the left end of the seesaw member 3303 is lowered and the opening 3303a at the left end coincides with the front end opening of the left collection passage 3329a in the ball collection passage member 3329 facing the left portal 3306, the effect ball enters the left portal 3306. 3301 enters (see FIG. 200B). On the other hand, when the right end of the seesaw member 3303 is lowered and the opening 3303a at the right end coincides with the front end opening of the right collection passage 3329b in the ball collection passage member 3329 facing the right portal 33067, the effect ball 3301 enters the right portal 3307. (See FIG. 200C).

  If the effect ball 3301 falls from the seesaw member 3303 while the seesaw member 3303 is swinging, or the effect ball 3301 does not enter the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307, the effect ball 3301 is the seesaw member 3303. It falls on the collection stage 3305 below the position and is collected by the collection stage 3305.

  The movement of the seesaw member 3303 in the rear rear unit 3300 is based on the special lottery result when the rotation of the sorting drive motor 3315 is controlled so that the effect ball 3301 enters the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307 without fail. And the rotation of the sorting drive motor 3315 may be controlled so that the effect ball 3301 may enter either the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307. In any case, the entry position of the effect ball 3301 released from the seesaw member 3303 can be detected by the left collection detection sensor 3334, the right collection detection sensor 3335, and the middle collection detection sensor 3336, and the detected entry position is A corresponding effect (for example, display of an effect image) is performed thereafter.

[2-6C. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 201 to 207. FIG. 201A is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 201B is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 202 is an exploded perspective view of the back right movable effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view. Further, FIG. 204 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right movable production unit as seen from the front after disassembling the rear right unit, and FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right movable production unit as seen from the rear after being exploded. FIG. FIG. 206 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back right unit in the back right movable effect unit. FIG. 207 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of the entire back right movable effect unit.

  As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 is arranged at the right side position of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the frame of the center accessory 2400 when viewed from the front, and the whole extends vertically. It has a vertically long form. This back-right movable effect unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 621 and extends in the vertical direction. The back-right unit base 3401 is mounted on the front right side of the back-right unit base 3401 and can emit light forward. A vertically long back right decorative board 3402, a back right decorative board cover 33 that covers the front side of the back right decorative board 3402 and irradiates light from the back right decorative board 3402 to a specific part of the center accessory 2400, and a back right decorative board. A plurality of (four in this example) units 3410 that are attached to the front surface of the back right unit base 3401 at the left side of the cover 3403 and the back right decorative board 3402 and are arranged in order from top to bottom. .

  The four back right units 3410 in the back right movable effect unit 3400 include a back right decorative member 3411 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and different alphabet letters formed on the front surface, and a rear side of the back right decorative member 3411. The back right character body 3412 in which a predetermined character is three-dimensionally arranged, the back right character body 3412 and the back right decoration member 3411 are moved, and the back right drive motor 3413 is driven to drive the back right A back right unit decoration board 3414 that is movable together with the decoration member 3411 and is attached to the rear side of the back right decoration member 3411 and can emit light toward the front side is provided.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a rotating shaft 3404 that pivotally supports the back right decorative member 3411 of the four back right units 3410 so as to be rotatable. The rotating shaft 3404 has an upper end supported on the upper portion of the back right unit base 3401 by a washer 3405 and an E ring 3406, and a lower end supported by the washer 3405 and the E ring 3406 at the lower portion of the back right fourth unit 3410D described later. It is supported by. Further, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the lower front portion of the back right unit base 3401. The back right drive motor 3413, the back right unit decoration board 3414, and the back right decoration board 3402 of the four back right units 3410, A back right relay board 3407 for relaying the connection between the first lamp drive board 3014 and the second lamp drive board 3018 is provided.

  The back right unit 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a back right first unit 3410A, a back right second unit 3410B, a back right third unit 3410C, and a back right fourth unit in order from the top as shown in the figure. 3410D. These back right first unit 3410A, back right second unit 3410B, back right third unit 3410C, and back right fourth unit 3410D are back right first decorative member 3411A as back right decorative member 3411, back right second. The decorative member 3411B, the back right third decorative member 3411C, the back right fourth decorative member 3411D, and the back right character body 3412 are three-dimensional in different states such as the costume and hairstyle of the same character as the back upper character body 3302 The back right first character body 3412A, the back right second character body 3412B, the back right third character body 3412C, and the back right fourth character body 3412D are provided.

  Further, the back right unit 3410 slides the back right first character body 3412A, the back right second character body 3412B, the back right third character body 3412C, and the back right fourth character body 3412D in the left-right direction, respectively, Back right as a back right drive motor 3413 for rotating the right first decorative member 3411A, the back right second decorative member 3411B, the back right third decorative member 3411C, and the back right fourth decorative member 3411D about the rotation axis 3404. A first drive motor 3413A, a back right second drive motor 3413B, a back right third drive motor 3413C, and a back right fourth drive motor 3413D are provided.

  Further, the back right unit 3410 is arranged on the back side of the back right first decorative member 3411A, the back right second decorative member 3411B, the back right third decorative member 3411C, and the back right fourth decorative member 3411D, respectively. A back right first unit decorative board 3414A as a back right unit decorative board 3414 for emitting and decorating one decorative member 3411A, back right second decorative member 3411B, back right third decorative member 3411C, and back right fourth decorative member 3411D; A back right second unit decorative board 3414B, a back right third unit decorative board 3414C, and a back right fourth unit decorative board 3414D are provided (see FIG. 203).

  In the back right movable effect unit 3400 of this example, the back right first unit 3410A of the back right unit 3410 is formed so that the letter “L” has translucency on the back right first decorative member 3411A as shown in the figure. The letter “L” is emitted by the LED 3414a of the back right first unit decoration board 3414A arranged on the rear side. The back right second unit 3410B is formed so that the letter “I” has translucency on the back right second decorative member 3411B, and the back right second unit decorative board 3414B arranged on the rear side. The LED 3414a emits the letter “I”. The back right third unit 3410C is formed so that the letter “V” has translucency on the back right third decorative member 3411C, and the back right third unit decorative board 3414C disposed on the rear side. LED 3414a emits the letter “V”. Further, the back right fourth unit 3410D is formed so that the letter “E” has translucency on the back right fourth decorative member 3411D, and the back right fourth unit decorative board 3414D disposed on the rear side. LED 3414a emits the letter “E”.

  The back right unit 3410 in the back right movable effect unit 3400 is basically the same as the back right first unit 3410A, the back right second unit 3410B, the back right third unit 3410C, and the back right fourth unit 3410D. A more detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205 and the like. In FIGS. 204 and 205, the back right fourth unit 3410D is shown as the back right unit 3410, but the other back right unit 3410 has the same configuration.

  The back right decorative member 3411 of the back right unit 3410 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened as shown in the figure, and the back right unit decorative board 3414 is attached inside. Further, the back right decorative member 3411 pivots through a pair of plate-like extension pieces 3411a extending rearward from the rear right end of the upper wall and the lower wall, and the extension piece 3411a coaxially in the vertical direction. A shaft support hole 3411b through which the shaft 3404 is inserted and a long hole 3411c (see FIG. 205) formed in the vicinity of the rear end of the lower wall and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction are provided.

  The back right unit decoration board 3414 includes a plurality of LEDs 3414a mounted on the surface and a strip-shaped connection cable 3414b having flexibility extending from the right end to the outside. Although not shown in detail, the connection cable 3414 b extending from the back right unit decorative board 3414 is connected to the back right decorative board 3402.

  This back right unit 3410 is attached to the upper side of the partition base 3415 and the plate-like partition base 3415 extending in the horizontal direction by partitioning the lower end of the back right unit 3410 and rotating to the upper surface of the back right unit base 3401 And a slide case 3416 to which a back right drive motor 3413 is attached so that the shaft extends downward.

  The partition base 3415 in the back right unit 3410 protrudes upward from the left rear position of the shaft hole 3415a and a shaft hole 3415a through which the rotation shaft 3404 is inserted into the front side at the substantially center in the left-right direction, and a predetermined amount in the left-right direction. The guide part 3415c is different from the restricting part 3415b that extends, and the guide part 3415c that is arranged on the rear side of the restricting part 3415b and extends from the right side position to the left end of the shaft hole 3415a and protrudes lower than the restricting part 3415b. And a slit 3415d extending in the vertical direction at the position and extending in the horizontal direction. The slide case 3416 has a guide part 3416a extending in the left-right direction at substantially the same length as the partition base 3415 at the rear end, and a rear right drive motor disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in front view above the guide part 3416a. A motor mounting portion 3416b for mounting 3413.

  The back right unit 3410 is supported between the slide case 3416 and the partition base 3415 by a slide case 3416 and guide portions 3415c and 3416a of the partition base 3415 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A slider 3417 having an extended rack gear 3417a and a back right character body 3412 attached to the left side of the rack gear 3417a; a drive gear 3418 that meshes with the rack gear 3417a of the slider 3417 and is fixed to the rotating shaft of the back right drive motor 3413; A link member 3419 that transmits the movement of the slider 3417 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the drive gear 3418 and rotates the back right decoration member 3411 about the rotation shaft 3404.

  The slider 3417 in the back right unit 3410 has a slightly shorter length than the partition base 3415 and extends in the left-right direction, and includes a protruding piece 3417b protruding forward from the upper part of the front end at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and a protruding piece 3417b. A through hole 3417c penetrating in the vertical direction at the front end and a detection piece 3417d extending downward from the lower surface through a slit 3415d of the partition base 3415 are provided. The protruding piece 3417b of the slider 3417 protrudes above the guide portion 3415c in the partition base 3415, and is formed at a height at which a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the upper surface of the guide portion 3415c.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the link member 3419 is formed in a “<” shape with the left side bent from the approximate center in the left-right direction, and the guide portion 3415 c of the partition base 3415 and the protruding piece 3417 b of the slider 3417. And a projecting pin 3419a projecting upward inserted into the through hole 3417c of the slider 3417 and a connecting hole 3419b penetrating in the vertical direction at the left end. The link member 3419 is configured such that the right end protruding pin 3419a is inserted into the through hole 3417c of the slider 3417 from below, and in the assembled state, the guide portion 3415c of the partition base 3415 and the protruding piece b of the slider 3417 It will be in the state pinched between. In addition, the link member 3419 slides in the left-right direction together with the slider 3417 by inserting the protruding pin 3419a into the through-hole 3417c of the slider 3417, and rotates about the axis of the through-hole 3417c in the slider 3417. Be able to.

  The link member 3419 has a width substantially the same as the width of the guide portion 3415c in the partition base 3415. Further, the front side of the link member 3419 is in contact with the rear surface of the restricting portion 3415b in the partition base 3415 depending on the position in the left-right direction. It does not rotate around the center axis.

  The back right unit 3410 is inserted into a connecting hole 3419b formed at the left end of the link member 3419 and a long hole 3411c of the back right decorative member 3411. And a fixed bushing 3421 that is attached to the lower end of the connection pin 3420 and prevents the connection pin 3420 from being pulled out of the long hole 3411c and the long hole 3419b.

  Further, the back right unit 3410 detects a detection piece 3417d of the slider 3417 extending downward through the slit 3415d of the partition base 3415, and detects a slide position detection sensor 3422 for detecting the slide position of the slider 3417 in the left-right direction. A back decoration member 3423 that is arranged behind the character body 3412 and decorates the back of the back right character body 3412; a cable presser 3424 that fixes a part of the connection cable 3414b of the back right unit decoration board 3414 to the slide case 3416; And a shaft support bushing 3425 into which the rotation shaft 3404 is inserted. The shaft support bushing 3425 is inserted into the pair of shaft support holes 3411b in the back right decorative member 3411.

  As shown in FIG. 206A, the right-side unit 3410 has a right-left position at the right end of the slider 3417 substantially coincides with the right end of the partition base 3415 in a normal state (initial first position state). The rear left decorative member 3411 is as close as possible to the partition base 3415 as well as the rear right character body 3412 attached to the left end of the slider 3417. The whole is located just behind the back right decorative member 3411. In this state, the left end of the back right character body 3412 is slightly visible from the player side behind the back right decorative member 3411. Further, in the state of the first position, as shown in the drawing, the front surface of the back right decoration member 3411 is inclined so as to recede toward the rear as it goes to the left side. The long hole 3411c formed in the back right decorative member 3411 is also in a state where the left end side is located behind the right end side and inclined with respect to the left-right direction.

  When the back right drive motor 3413 is driven from this state and the drive gear 3418 is rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view, the slider 3417 slides to the left by the rack gear 3417a meshed with the drive gear 3418, and the front view is seen. A back right character body 3412 gradually appears on the left side of the back right decorative member 3411. When the slider 3417 slides to the left, the link member 3419 also slides to the left through the protruding pin 3419a inserted in the through hole 3417c of the slider 3417. By the way, in the state of the first position, the link member 3419 is in a state where the front side thereof is in contact with the restricting portion 3415b of the partition base 3415 and can slide to the left together with the slider 3417. The slider 3417 cannot be rotated around the axis centered on the through hole 3417c.

  When the link member 3419 slides to the left together with the slider 3417, the left end of the link member 3419 also slides to the left together, and the connecting pin 3420 inserted into the connecting hole 3419b at the left end of the link member 3417 is inserted. The inside of the long hole 3411c of the back right decorative member 3411 is slid leftward. When the connecting pin 3420 slides in the elongated hole 3411c inclined obliquely to the left, the side surface of the connecting pin 3420 presses the inner surface of the elongated hole 3411c in the forward direction. The decorative member 3411 is slightly rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view around the rotation axis 3404. Thereby, the amount of rotation of the back right decoration member 3411 can be reduced sensibly than the amount of appearance of the back right character body 3412, so that the back right decoration member 3411 does not rotate with respect to the player. It is possible to make an illusion that only the back right character body 3412 moves.

  The slider 3417 is slid leftward from the first position by the rotational drive of the back right drive motor 3413, and the center of the through hole 3417c in the slider 3417 is in the second position where it substantially coincides with the left end of the restricting portion 3415b in the partition base 3415 ( In the state of FIG. 206 (B), the front side of the link member 3419 is separated from the restricting portion 3415b, and the restriction of rotation by the restricting portion 3415b is released, so that the link member 3419 can be turned. Since the slider 3417 is arranged on the rear surface side of the link member 3419, the link member 3419 can be rotated only in the direction in which the left end moves forward (counterclockwise direction in plan view). It has become. In the second position, as shown in the drawing, the connecting pin 3420 inserted into the left end connecting hole 3419b of the link member 3419 reaches the left end of the long hole 3411c in the back right decorative member 3411. Yes.

  When the slider 3417 is further slid leftward from the state of the second position by the back right drive motor 3413, the back right character body 3412 is further slid leftward so that a larger range can be seen from the player side. . On the other hand, in the link member 3419 that slides to the left together with the slider 3417, the right end protruding pin 3419a side connected to the slider 3417 slides to the left side, whereas the left end connecting hole 3419b side is the left end of the long hole 3411c. The connecting pin 3420 that has reached the position prevents sliding to the left. As a result, the force to slide the connecting pin 3420 to the left changes to a force pushing the back right decorative member 3411 forward, and the back right decorative member 3411 is counterclockwise in plan view with the rotation axis 3404 as the center. It will rotate greatly in the direction of rotation.

  When the entire back right character body 3412 slides to the left side of the back right decoration member 3411 in the front view and appears completely (the third position), the back right drive motor 3413 rotates. The driving is stopped, and the sliding of the back right character body 3412 (slider 3417) and the rotation of the back right decoration member 3411 are stopped (see FIG. 206C). In the state of the third position, as shown in the figure, the back right character body 3412 appears completely, and the front surface of the back right decorative member 3411 is inclined so as to recede toward the rear as it goes to the right. It has become. Thereby, from the player side, the back right decorative member 3411 appears to have moved away, and the illusion that the back right character body 3412 protrudes (appears) greatly in the left direction can be made.

  In the third position, the back right decoration member 3411 faces the outside of the game area 605. Therefore, even if the LED 3414a of the back right unit decoration board 3414 emits light in this state, the optical axis of the LED 3414a Is facing away from the player, the back right decoration member 3411 can be prevented from being dazzled, and the back right character body 3412 on the rear side can be easily seen.

  When returning from the third position state to the initial first position state, the back right drive motor 3413 reverses the drive gear 3418 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view to move the slider 3417 to the right. When the slide position detection sensor 3422 detects the detection piece 3417d of the slider 3417, the rotation of the back right drive motor 3413 is stopped to return to the first position.

  By the way, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the present example includes four back right units 3410 adjacent in the vertical direction, and each of the back right drive motors 3413 (back right first drive motor 3413A, back right) The second drive motor 3413B, the back right third drive motor 3413C, and the back right fourth drive motor 3413D) can be independently driven and controlled. Accordingly, for example, as shown in FIG. 207, the start of the rotational drive of the back right drive motor 3413 in each back right unit 3410 is delayed by a predetermined time from the initial first position, and the first position The back right drive motor 3413 repeats forward and reverse rotations so that the back right character body 3412 (slider 3417) reciprocates between the position and the third position. Can be seen as moving in a wave shape, and a movable effect that can attract the player's interest can be performed.

[2-6D. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back rear movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 208 to 211. FIG. 208 is a front view showing a state in which each swivel decoration unit of the back and back movable effect unit in the back unit has moved to the retracted position, and FIG. 209 shows a state in which each swivel decoration unit of the back and back movable effect unit has moved to the appearance position. FIG. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable production unit as seen from the rear.

  The rear rear movable effect unit 3500 is attached to a position outside the opening 621c in the back box 621, and from the right side of the opening 621c (liquid crystal display device 1400) of the back box 621 to the center of the opening 621c in front view. A right-hand swivel decoration unit 3510 that can be projected and retracted, a right-hand swivel decoration unit 3510 that is driven to swivel around a predetermined axis, and is attached to the lower right corner in the back box 621; The upper swivel decoration unit 3540 which can be projected and retracted from the upper side of the opening 621c of the back box 621 toward the center of the opening 621c, and the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 are swiveled around a predetermined axis to be centered in the horizontal direction in the back box 621. The upper turning drive unit 3550 attached to the upper left side from the bottom, and the lower side of the opening 621c of the back box 621 in front view The lower turning decoration unit 3570 that can be projected and retracted toward the center of the opening 621c, and the lower turning decoration unit 3570 that is driven to turn about a predetermined axis and is attached slightly upward from the lower left corner of the back box 621. A drive unit 3580.

  The right turn decoration unit 3510, the upper turn decoration unit 3550, and the lower turn decoration unit 3570 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 are provided with fan-shaped tip decoration parts 3510a, 3540a, and 3570a on the free ends, respectively. When the swiveling decorative units 3510, 3540, and 3570 are swung and moved to the appearance positions so that the front decorations 3510a, 3540a, and 3570a appear at the center of the opening 621c of the back box 621 in front view, the front decorations 3510a, 3540a and 3570a come into contact with each other and can be combined to form one large circular main decorative body 3501 (see FIG. 209, etc.).

[2-6D-1. Right turn decoration unit and right turn drive unit]
Subsequently, the right part turning decoration unit 3510 and the right part turning drive unit 3520 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 210 to 215. FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side swivel decoration unit in the back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 213 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 212 as seen from the back. 214 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side turning drive unit in the rear-back movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front side together with the right-side turning decoration unit, and FIG. 215 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 214 viewed from the rear side. It is.

  The right part turning decoration unit 3510 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 includes a right part turning decoration member 3511 that extends in a predetermined direction (in the oblique vertical direction in FIG. 212) and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. Yes. As shown in the figure, this right-side turning decorative member 3511 is arranged in an arc-shaped decorative frame portion 3511a from the center of the front surface to the tip side, and is arranged inside the circular arc in the decorative frame portion 3511a and three-dimensionally shaped a predetermined character. The back rear right character body 3511b and the back surface imitating a cloth having a plurality of folds that form the background of the back back right character body 3511b and fan-shaped from the approximate center of the arc of the decorative frame portion 3511a toward the decorative frame portion 3511a. A decorative portion 3511c and an outer decorative portion 3511d that is continuous with the design of the back decorative portion 3511c and extends from the outer periphery to the base end of the decorative frame portion 3511a are provided.

  The back rear right character body 3511b in the right turning decoration member 3511 is the same character as the back upper character body 3302, the back right character body 3412, etc., and has different aspects such as a costume and a hairstyle. The form is like singing. Further, the back surface decoration portion 3511c and the outside decoration portion 3511d are formed of a material having translucency.

  Further, the right swirling decorative unit 3510 supports the rear side of the right swirling decorative member 3511, and the longitudinal direction in which the right swirling decorative member 3511 extends outside the base end of the right swirling decorative member 3511. A right-side swivel decorative base 3512 having a base portion 3512a extending in a substantially right-angle direction and a shaft hole 3512b that passes through the base portion 3512a in the front-rear direction and into which a turning shaft 3521 of the right-side turning drive unit 3520 described later is inserted. ing. The right swivel decoration base 3512 has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the right swivel decoration member 3511 and includes a plurality of openings 3512c penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right turning decoration base 3512 includes a magnet support portion 3512d that supports the united magnet 3515 at a position corresponding to the end of the arc of the decoration frame portion 3511a in the right turning decoration member 3511.

  Further, the right turning decoration unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the base 3512a of the right turning decoration base 3512, and has an arc shape centering on the axial center of the shaft hole 3513a and the shaft hole 3513a into which the turning shaft 3521 is inserted. A gear member 3513 having a gear portion 3513b in which gear teeth are arranged. As shown in the figure, the gear member 3513 further includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3513c extending outward and a protrusion 3513d protruding forward from the front surface.

  The right turning decoration unit 3510 includes a back rear right decoration board 3514 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3514a that are attached to the rear side of the right turning decoration base 3512 and can emit light forward, and a right turning decoration base 3512. A magnet support portion 3512d supported by the magnet support portion 3512d, and a pivot shaft support plate 3516 having a shaft hole 3516a into which the pivot shaft 3521 is inserted and attached to the rear side of the base portion 3512a of the right portion pivot decoration base 3512. I have. The light from the LED 3514a of the back right decorative board 3514 is irradiated to the rear side of the right turning decoration member 3511 through an opening 3512c formed in the right turning decoration base 3512.

  In the right turning decoration unit 3510, a decoration part 3511a, a back rear right character body 3511b, and a back decoration part 3511c in the right turning decoration member 3511 constitute a tip decoration part 3510a.

  The right part turning drive unit 3520 in the back rear movable effect unit 3500 is inserted into each of the shaft holes 3512b, 3513a, and 3516a of the right part turning decoration base 3512, the gear member 3513, and the turning shaft support plate 3516 in the right part turning decoration unit 3510. Swivel shaft 3521, a unit base 3522 that supports the rear end of the swivel shaft 3521 and is mounted in the back box 621, a unit front member 3523 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3522 and supports the front end of the swivel shaft 3521. It is equipped with.

  In addition, the right-side turning drive unit 3520 includes a back-rear right-side drive motor 3524 attached so that the rotation shaft extends rearward at a predetermined position on the front surface of the unit front member 3523, and a rotation of the back-rear-right right-side drive motor 3524. A drive gear 3525 that is fixed to the shaft and disposed between the unit base 3522 and the unit front member 3523, a large-diameter first gear portion 3526a that meshes with the drive gear 3525, and a right-hand turn with a smaller diameter than the first gear portion 3526a A transmission gear 3526 having a second gear portion 3526b meshing with the gear portion 3513b of the gear member 3513 in the decoration unit 3510, and the first gear portion 3526a and the second gear portion 3526b being coaxially rotatable integrally, and transmission The gear 3526 is rotatably supported, and both ends are supported by the unit base 3522 and the unit front member 3523. Right and back right that can detect the turning position of the right turning decoration unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3513c of the gear member 3513 in the right turning decoration unit 3510 attached to the transmission gear shaft 3527 and a predetermined position of the unit base 3522. Part turning position detection sensor 3528.

  The unit front member 3523 of the right part turning drive unit 3520 includes an arcuate slit 3523a penetrating in the front-rear direction around the axis of the turning shaft 3521. This unit front member 3523 is configured such that the protrusion 3513d of the gear member 3513 in the right turn decorative unit 3510 is inserted into the slit 3523a, and the protrusion of the gear member 3513 is at the end in the arc direction of the slit 3523a. The turning range of the right-side turning decoration unit 3510 can be restricted by contacting 3513d.

  In the right part turning drive unit 3520 of this example, when the drive gear 3525 is rotated by the back right side drive motor 3524, the right part turning decoration unit 3510 is rotated around the turning axis 3521 via the transmission gear 3526 engaged with the drive gear 3525. It is designed to rotate. As a result, the tip decoration portion 3510a of the right turn decoration unit 3510 is turned. In this example, the right turn decoration unit 3510 can be turned within a range of about 43 °.

[2-6D-2. Upper swivel decoration unit and upper swivel drive unit]
Next, the upper turning decoration unit 3540 and the upper turning drive unit 3550 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 210, 211, and 216 to 219. FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the upper turning decoration unit in the back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 216 as seen from the back. FIG. 218 is an exploded perspective view of the upper turning drive unit in the back and rear movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front side together with the upper turning decoration unit, and FIG. 219 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 218 seen from the rear side. .

  The upper turning decoration unit 3540 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 includes an upper turning decoration member 3541 that extends in a predetermined direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 216) and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. As shown in the drawing, the upper turning decorative member 3541 includes a decorative frame portion 3541a in which the left oblique line of the letter “A” is designed in a circular arc shape from the center of the front surface to the front end side (lower side), and a decorative frame portion 3541a. A back rear upper character body 3541b that is arranged inside and below the arc and three-dimensionally shapes a predetermined character, and a back decoration portion 3541c that imitates a cloth that forms the background of the back back upper character body 3541b and has a plurality of pleats And an outer decorative part 3541d that is continuous with the design of the back decorative part 3541c and extends from the outer periphery of the decorative frame part 3541a to the base end (upper end).

  The decorative frame portion 3541a of the upper swiveling decorative member 3541 has the left oblique line of the letter “A” designed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc-shaped portion is the right swiveling decorative member in the right swirling decorative unit 3410. It has the same diameter as the decorative frame portion 3411a of 3411 and is formed in a fan shape as a whole. The back rear upper character body 3541b is the same character as the back back right character body 3511b, and has different aspects such as costumes and hairstyles. Like the back back right character body 3511b, it sings with a microphone in hand. It is in a form that is. Further, the back surface decoration portion 3541c and the outside decoration portion 3541d are formed of a light-transmitting material.

  The upper swivel decoration unit 3540 supports the rear side of the upper swivel decoration member 3541 and extends through the base 3542a and the base 3542a in the front-rear direction, extending outward from the base end (upper end) of the upper swivel decoration member 3541. An upper turning decoration base 3542 having a shaft hole 3542b into which a turning shaft 3551 of the upper turning drive unit 3550 described later is inserted is further provided. The upper swivel decoration base 3542 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the upper swivel decoration member 3541 and is formed of a light-transmitting material. The upper turning decoration base 3542 includes a magnet holding part 3542c for holding the united magnet 3545 at positions corresponding to both ends of the arcuate portion of the decoration frame part 3541a in the upper turning decoration member 3541, and a decoration frame. A holding recess 3542d for accommodating and holding the holding magnet 3547, which is formed in the vicinity of the highest part when the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is in the retracted position outside the arc of the portion 3541a.

  Further, the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 is attached to the rear surface of the base 3542a of the upper swivel decoration base 3542. And a gear member 3513 having a gear portion 3543b in which are arranged.

  The upper swivel decoration unit 3540 is mounted on the rear side of the upper swivel decoration base 3542 and has a back rear upper decoration board 3544 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3544a that can emit light forward, and a magnet support in the upper swivel decoration base 3542. In the upper turning decorative base 3542, the united magnet 3545 supported by the portion 3542c, the turning shaft support plate 3546 having a shaft hole 3546a that is attached to the front side of the base 3542a in the upper turning decoration base 3542 and into which the turning shaft 3551 is inserted. A holding magnet 3547 that is inserted and held in the holding recess 3542d and is larger than the united magnet 3545. As shown in the figure, the swivel shaft support plate 3546 includes a plate-like detection piece 3546b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the swivel shaft 3551, and a protrusion 3546c projecting forward from the front surface. .

  In the upper turning decoration unit 3540, the decoration frame portion 3541a, the back upper back character body 3541b, and the back decoration portion 3541c in the upper turning decoration member 3541 constitute a tip decoration portion 3540a.

  Further, the holding magnet 3547 of the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is magnetically attached to the holding plate 3030 disposed in the back box 621 when the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is in the retracted position where the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is turned upward. When the swivel decoration unit 3540 is held in the retracted position, the load applied to the back and rear upper drive motor 3554 of the upper swivel drive unit 3550 described later can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 218 and the like, the upper turning drive unit 3550 in the rear movable effect unit 3500 includes an upper turning decoration base 3542, a gear member 3543, and shaft holes 3542b of the turning shaft support plate 3546 in the upper turning decoration unit 3540. 3543a and 3546a are inserted into the pivot shaft 3551, the rear end of the pivot shaft 3551 is supported and the unit base 3552 is mounted in the back box 621. A unit front member 3553.

  Further, the upper turning drive unit 3550 is fixed to the rear rear upper drive motor 3554 that is attached so that the rotation shaft extends rearward at a predetermined position on the front surface of the unit front member 3553, and the rear rear upper drive motor 3554. In the upper turning decoration unit 3540, the drive gear 3555 disposed between the unit base 3552 and the unit front member 3553, the large-diameter first gear portion 3556a meshing with the drive gear 3555, and the first gear portion 3556a having a smaller diameter. A transmission gear 3556 having a second gear portion 3556b meshing with the gear portion 3543b of the gear member 3543 and the first gear portion 3556a and the second gear portion 3556b being coaxially rotatable integrally with each other, and the transmission gear 3556 being rotated. Both ends are supported by the unit base 3552 and the unit front member 3553. The rear rear upper portion that is attached to a predetermined position of the transmission gear shaft 3557 and the unit base 3552 and can detect the turning position of the upper turning decoration unit 3540 by detecting the detection piece 3546b of the turning shaft support plate 3546 in the upper turning decoration unit 3540. And a turning position detection sensor 3558.

  The unit front member 3553 of the upper turning drive unit 3550 includes an arc-shaped slit 3553a that penetrates in the front-rear direction around the axis of the turning shaft 3551. The unit front member 3553 is configured such that the protrusion 3546c of the turning shaft support plate 3546 in the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is inserted into the slit 3553a, and the turning shaft support plate 3546 is disposed at the end of the slit 3553a in the arc direction. The projecting portion 3546c is in contact with the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 so that the swivel range of the upper swivel decoration unit 3540 can be regulated.

  The drive gear 3555 in the upper turning drive unit 3550 has substantially the same diameter as the drive gear 3525 of the right turn drive unit 3520. In the transmission gear 3556 of the upper turning drive unit 3550, the diameter of the first gear portion 3556a is about ½ of the diameter of the first gear portion 3526a in the transmission gear 3526 of the right turning drive unit 3520. The diameter of the second gear part 3556b is substantially the same as the diameter of the second gear part 3526b in the transmission gear 3526 of the right part turning drive unit 3520.

  In the upper turning drive unit 3550 of this example, when the driving gear 3555 is rotated by the rear upper drive motor 3554, the upper turning decoration unit 3540 rotates around the turning shaft 3551 via the transmission gear 3556 engaged with the driving gear 3555. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the tip decoration part 3540a in the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is turned. In this example, the upper turning decoration unit 3540 can be turned within an angle range of about 90 °.

[2-6D-3. Lower swivel decoration unit and lower swivel drive unit]
Next, the lower turning decoration unit 3570 and the lower turning driving unit 3580 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 210, 211, and 220 to 223. 220 is an exploded perspective view of the lower swivel decoration unit in the back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 220 as seen from the back. FIG. 222 is an exploded perspective view of the lower turning drive unit in the back and rear movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front side together with the lower turning decoration unit, and FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 222 seen from the rear side. .

  The lower turning decoration unit 3570 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 includes a lower turning decoration member 3571 that extends in a predetermined direction (oblique vertical direction in FIG. 220) and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. As shown in the figure, the lower swivel decoration member 3571 is a decoration having an inverted V-shaped part from the center of the front surface to the tip side, and an arc-shaped part extending from the lower end of the inverted V-shaped part to both sides. A frame portion 3571a is provided. Further, the lower turning decoration member 3571 is arranged on the left side of the inverted V-shaped portion inside the arc in the decoration frame portion 3511a, and a rear back lower character body 3571b in which a predetermined character is three-dimensionally formed, and a back rear lower character A back decoration part 3571c that imitates a cloth having a plurality of creases and forming a background such as a body 3571b; an outer decoration part 3571d that continues from the design of the back decoration part 3571c and extends from the outer periphery of the decoration frame part 3571a to the base end; It has.

  The back rear lower character body 3571b in the lower turning decoration member 3571 is the same character as the back rear right character body 3511a and the back rear upper character body 3541a, and has different aspects such as costumes and hairstyles. Like the body 3511b and the like, it is configured to sing with a microphone in hand. Further, the back surface decoration portion 3571c and the outside decoration portion 3571d are formed of a light-transmitting material.

  The lower swivel decorative unit 3570 supports the rear side of the lower swivel decorative member 3571, and extends to the outside from the base end of the lower swivel decorative member 3571, and a lower part that passes through the base 3572a in the front-rear direction and will be described later. A lower turning decoration base 3572 having a shaft hole 3572b into which the turning shaft 3581 of the turning drive unit 3580 is inserted is further provided. The lower swivel decoration base 3572 has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the lower swivel decoration member 3571, and has a plurality of openings 3572c penetrating in the front-rear direction. The lower turning decoration base 3572 includes a magnet support portion 3572d for supporting the united magnet 3575 at a position corresponding to the end of the arc of the decoration frame portion 3571a in the lower turning decoration member 3571.

  Further, the lower swivel decoration unit 3570 is attached to the rear surface of the base 3572a of the lower swivel decoration base 3572, and has a shaft hole 3573a into which the swivel shaft 3581 is inserted, and a gear tooth in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 3573a. And a gear member 3573 having a gear portion 3573b in which are arranged. As shown in the figure, the gear member 3573 includes a protruding portion 3573c protruding forward from the front surface, and a plate-shaped detection piece 3573d extending from the tip of the protruding portion 3573c in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the turning shaft 3581. And.

  The lower swivel decoration unit 3570 is attached to the rear side of the lower swirl decoration base 3572 and has a back rear lower decoration board 3574 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3574a that can emit light forward, and a magnet support in the lower swivel decoration base 3572. And a turning shaft support plate 3576 having a shaft hole 3576a that is attached to the front side of the base portion 3572a of the lower turning decoration base 3572 and into which the turning shaft 3581 is inserted. Light from the LED 3574a of the back lower decorative substrate 3574 is irradiated to the rear side of the lower swivel decorative member 3571 through an opening 3572c formed in the lower swivel decorative base 3572.

  In the lower turning decoration unit 3570, the decoration part 3571a, the back rear lower character body 3571b, and the back decoration part 3571c in the lower turning decoration member 3571 constitute a tip decoration part 3570a.

  The lower turning drive unit 3580 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 is turned through the shaft holes 3572b, 3573a, and 3576a of the lower turning decoration base 3572, the gear member 3573, and the turning shaft support plate 3576 in the lower turning decoration unit 3570. A shaft 3581, a unit base 3582 that supports the rear end of the pivot shaft 3581 and is mounted in the back box 621, and a unit front member 3583 that is mounted on the front side of the unit base 3582 and supports the front end of the pivot shaft 3581. ing.

  Further, the lower turning drive unit 3580 is fixed to the rear and lower lower drive motor 3584 attached so that the rotation shaft extends rearward at a predetermined position on the front surface of the unit front member 3583, and to the rotation shaft of the rear and lower lower drive motor 3584. In the lower turning decorative unit 3570, the drive gear 3585 disposed between the unit base 3582 and the unit front member 3583, the large-diameter first gear portion 3586a meshing with the drive gear 3585, and the smaller diameter than the first gear portion 3586a. A transmission gear 3586 having a second gear portion 3586b that meshes with the gear portion 3573b of the gear member 3573, the first gear portion 3586a and the second gear portion 3586b being coaxially rotatable together, and the transmission gear 3586 rotating. Both ends are supported by unit base 3582 and unit front member 3583. Back and lower lower turning position capable of detecting the turning position of the lower turning decoration unit 3570 by detecting the detection piece 3573d of the gear member 3573 in the lower turning decoration unit 3570 attached to a predetermined position of the transmission gear shaft 3587 and the unit base 3582 And a detection sensor 3588.

  The unit front member 3583 of the lower turning drive unit 3580 includes an arc-shaped recess 3583a that is recessed forward from the rear side around the axis of the turning shaft 3521. The unit front member 3583 is configured such that the protruding portion 3573c of the gear member 3573 in the lower turning decoration unit 3570 is inserted into the recessed portion 3583a, and the protruding portion 3573c of the gear member 3573 is disposed at the end of the recessed portion 3573a in the arc direction. Makes it possible to regulate the turning range of the lower turning decoration unit 3570.

  In this lower turning drive unit 3580, the diameter of the drive gear 3585 is substantially the same as the diameter of the drive gear 3525 of the right turn drive unit 3520. Further, the transmission gear 3586 of the lower turning drive unit 3580 has the first gear portion 3586a and the second gear portion 3586b having the same diameter as the first gear portion 3526a and the second gear portion 3526b of the transmission gear 3526 in the right portion turning drive unit 3520. The diameter of each is approximately the same.

  In the lower turning drive unit 3580 of this example, when the drive gear 3585 is rotated by the back and lower lower drive motor 3584, the lower turning decoration unit 3570 rotates around the turning shaft 3581 via the transmission gear 3586 that meshes with the drive gear 3585. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the tip decoration part 3570a in the lower turning decoration unit 3570 turns. In this example, the lower turning decoration unit 3570 can be turned within an angle range of about 40 °.

[2-6D-4. About the movable rendition of the backward movable directivity unit]
Next, the movable effect of the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram showing a turning range of each turning decoration unit in the back and rear movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a movable effect by a back-back movable effect unit, and FIG. 226 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a movable effect by a back-back movable effect unit different from FIG.

  The back and rear movable effect unit 3500 in this example is configured such that three swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 can move (turn) independently. In addition, as shown in FIG. 224, the swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 have different swivel ranges, and the right swivel decor unit 3510 has an upper swivel decoration of about 43 °. The unit 3540 is about 90 °, and the lower swivel decoration unit 3570 is about 40 °. That is, in the rear movable effect unit 3500 of this example, the turning range of the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is about twice as much as the turning range of the other turning decoration units 3510 and 3570.

  Further, as described above, in the rear rear movable production unit 3500, the diameter of the first gear portion 3556a of the transmission gear 3556 in the upper turning drive unit 3550 is about ½ of the other first gear portions 3526a and 3586a. When the drive motors 3524, 3554, and 3584 are rotated at the same speed, only the upper turning decoration unit 3540 turns at twice the speed of the other turning decoration units 3510 and 3570. That is, in this example, the upper turning decoration unit 3540 can turn fast and large.

  In the normal state, the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 of this example has the swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 moved backward from the opening 621 c in the back box 621 (outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400). It is in the state located in. In this retreated position state, the respective turning decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 are hardly visible from the player side.

  The back and rear movable production unit 3500 is movable in accordance with the special lottery result drawn by the start winning. For example, as shown in FIG. When the lower turning decoration unit 3570 is turned from the retracted position to the appearance position, the fan-shaped tip decoration parts 3510a, 3540a, 3570a of the turning decoration units 3510, 3540, 3570 are brought into contact with each other and united. A circular main decorative body 3501 can be formed. As a result, a large main decorative body 3501 appears, and the player can be greatly surprised and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  When the three tip decorative portions 3510a, 3540a, and 3570a are combined, the combined magnets 3515, 3545, and 3575 provided in the respective swivel decorative units 3510, 3540, and 3570 are magnetically attached to each other, and each supports each other. Can be maintained well, and the load on the drive motors 3524, 3554, and 3584 of the right turn drive unit 3520, the upper turn drive unit 3550, and the lower turn drive unit 3580 can be reduced. It can be done.

  The back and rear movable effect unit 3500 includes a right turn decoration unit 3510, an upper turn decoration unit 3540, and a lower turn decoration unit 3570. The right turn drive unit 3520, the upper turn drive unit 3550, and a lower turn drive unit. 3580 can be turned independently of each other. Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, for example, as shown in FIG. 225, only the upper turning decoration unit 3540 appears from the reverse position. It can be turned to. As a result, one swirling decoration unit 3510, 3540, 3570 appears, so that an impression different from the case where all swirling decoration units 3510, 3540, 3570 appear at the same time can be given, and a movable effect can be enjoyed. In addition to the appearance of one swirling decoration unit 3540, it can be thought that the next swirling decoration unit 3510, 3570 will appear, which increases the player's expectation and lowers interest in games. Can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 226, after the right turning decoration unit 3510 and the lower turning decoration unit 3570 are turned together from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper turning decoration unit 3540 is moved from the retracted position. It is also possible to swivel to the appearance position and unite all the swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, 3570. Thereby, since two swirling decoration units 3510 and 3570 first appear and merge, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game, and further, the remaining swirling decoration unit 3540 appears and merges. It is possible to change the player's expectation with certainty and to expect an effect that can enhance the player's interest.

  In this example, the back and rear movable production unit 3500 is such that the tip decoration portions 3510a, 3540a, and 3570a of the three swiveling decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 each divide one circle every 120 ° in the circumferential direction. Since it is in the form, the impact force that the tip decoration parts 3510a, 3540a, 3570a abut each other when they are combined with each other is brought into contact with the other along the arc shape of each decoration frame part 3511a, 3541a, 3570a. It can be guided to the part, and the induced force and the abutting force act in the direction of canceling each other, and the rebounding is suppressed, so that the three swiveling decorative units 3510, 3540, 3570 can be securely connected to each other. And the impact caused by the contact is applied to the right turning drive unit 3520, the upper turning drive unit 3550, and It can be suppressed from being transmitted to the lower turning drive unit 3580 or the like, so that it is possible to back after moving direction unit 3500 is prevented from being easily broken.

[2-7. Movable production on game board]
Next, the movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 and 227 to 230. FIG. 227 is a front view showing the movement of the back movable movable effect unit on the game board, and FIG. 228 is a front view showing the movement of the back movable movable effect unit following FIG. FIG. 229 is a front view showing the movement of the back right movable effect unit on the game board. Further, FIG. 230 is a front view showing the movement of the back-back movable effect unit on the game board. As described above, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of movable effect units 3200, 3400, and 3500 that are movable in the back unit 3000. Based on the control signals from the peripheral control board 4140, various types are provided. A movable performance can be performed.

  In the gaming board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 148, the back movable production unit 3200 is located on the right side of the second big prize opening 2404 and above and above the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the frame of the center accessory 2400. The logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 having the logo characters of “Song” and “Princess” lined up on the left and right without interfering with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It looks good from the side. Further, in this state (normal state), a rear upper unit disposed on the rear side from a slight gap between the upper frame of the center accessory 2400 and the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230. A portion of the back 3300 character body 3302 can be seen.

  This allows the player to recognize that the back upper character body 3302 exists behind the back upper front unit 3210 (the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230). It can be easily recalled that the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 are movable so that the entire back upper character body 3302 can be seen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the movement of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 (the back upper unit 3210).

  In the game board 4, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is arranged at a position on the front side and the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center accessory 2400 as shown in FIG. 148, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. The back right first decorative member 3411A as the back right decorative member 3411 having the decorative characters "L", "I", "V", and "E" arranged vertically without interfering with the display screen of The member 3411B, the back right third decorative member 3411C, and the back right fourth decorative member 3411D can be clearly seen from the player side. As shown in the drawing, a part of each back right character body 3412 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is slightly visible from the left side of each back right decorative member 3411.

  Furthermore, the game board 4 has a back and rear movable production unit 3500 disposed at a position outside the center actor 2400 and outside the game panel 600 and at the front and outside of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is not visible from the player side in front view.

  In this game board 4, as shown in FIG. 227, when the logo left drive motor 3248 of the back upper front unit 3210 is driven to rotate, the logo left decorative member 3220 descends obliquely to the lower left, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 The rear upper character body 3302 of the rear upper rear unit 3300 disposed at the upper center of the center and the rear upper character body 3302 can be seen almost half from the player side. Accordingly, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is blocked by the logo left decorative member 3220, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the logo left decorative member 3220, and the back upper character body 3302 of the logo left decorative member 3220 is obtained. By making it more visible, it is possible to make the player think that the opportunity is near and to raise the expectation for the game.

  In this game board 4, when the logo left decoration part 3220 of the back movable production unit 3200 is lowered, the logo right decoration part 3230 is obliquely moved to the lower left by driving the logo right drive motor 3256 as shown in FIG. 228. And the entire upper back character body 3302 and the seesaw member 3303 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the arrival of the opportunity and enhance the interest, and at the same time, the seesaw member 3303 that the back character body 3302 has can be newly seen, and the rear side It is possible to make the player recognize that the placed back character body 3302 is not a simple decoration but another movable accessory (movable decorative body), which can greatly surprise the player and make a new movable The expectation with respect to the movement of an accessory can be heightened, and it can suppress that an interest falls.

  Although a detailed overall view of the game board 4 is omitted, the second big prize opening 2404 arranged at the upper part of the center accessory 2400 is closed with the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 lowered. When the second opening / closing member 2502 to be retracted and the second grand prize opening 2404 is in the open state, when a game ball is received into the second big prize opening 2404, the rear rear upper unit 3300 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3200 On the seesaw member 3303 held by the back upper character body 3302, an effect ball 3301 similar to a game ball is supplied (see FIG. 200). This rear rear unit 3300 is arranged on the right side of the second grand prize opening 2404, and the game ball received in the second big prize opening 2404 is supplied to the seesaw member 3303 to the player. So that the illusion can be made.

  When the effect ball 3301 is supplied onto the seesaw member 3303, the seesaw member 3303 is swung by the sorting drive motor 3315, and the effect ball 3301 supplied on the seesaw member 3303 is reciprocated to the left and right along the seesaw member 3303. Move. This makes it possible to make the player feel excited and entertained depending on which side of the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307 the stage ball 3301 rolling on the seesaw member 3303 is released. Be able to. Then, the effect sphere 3301 emitted from the seesaw member 3303 enters either the left portal 3306 or the right portal 3307, and an effect image corresponding to the entered portals 3306 and 3307 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It has become. In the game board 4 of this example, the number of effect balls 3301 corresponding to the number of game balls received in the second big prize opening 2404 is sequentially supplied onto the seesaw member 3303.

  In the game board 4, as shown in FIG. 229, when the four back right drive motors 3413 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 are respectively driven, the back right character body 3412 disposed on the rear side of the back right decoration member 3411. However, it slides to the left and is positioned on the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the back right decorative member 3411 rotates so that the left end moves forward with the right side as a rotation axis. From the player's side, the back right decoration member 3411 appears to have moved away, and the back right character body 3412 can be given an illusion that it has largely protruded (appeared) in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, each back right drive motor 3413 can be independently controlled to rotate, so that the back right drive motor 3413 starts to rotate as shown in the figure. By appropriately changing the timing, it becomes possible to make the four back-right character pairs 3412 (back-right unit 3410) appear to move in a wave shape, attracting the player's attention strongly and expecting the game. It can be raised.

  Further, in the game board 4, as shown in FIG. 230, the drive motors 3524, 3554, and 3584 of the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 are simultaneously rotated to be positioned at the retreat position outside the liquid crystal display device 1400. The swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 that are not visible from the player side can be swung to the appearance position so that they can be seen from the player side on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. , 3540, 3570 can be combined with each other. When these three tip decoration portions 3510a, 3540a, and 3570a are combined, one large main decoration body 3501 is formed, and the appearance of a huge main decoration body 3501 over almost the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. By this, the player can be greatly surprised and the expectation for the game can be greatly enhanced.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the game board 4 of the present example is capable of independently turning each turning decoration unit 3510, 3540, 3570 of the back and rear movable production unit 3500, The swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 that are swirled to appear can be combined as appropriate, and the appearance order of the swivel decoration units 3510, 3540, and 3570 can be appropriately changed, making it difficult to get bored by performing various movable effects. Be able to.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling image display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 231, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 3120 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101, a second start port sensor 2127 for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102, and a third start. Detection signals from a third start port sensor 2618 for detecting a game ball received in the port 2415 and some general winning port sensors 3122 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or a gate sensor 2304. , Detection signals from a general winning opening sensor 3122, a first count sensor 2128, a position detection sensor 2620 for detecting the moving position of the movable stage piece 2418 in the center accessory 2400, and a magnetic detection sensor 3028 attached to the back unit 3000. , Panel relay board 3086 attached to game board 4, main control I / O port 41 Through the 0b or is input. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a, via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3086, the start port solenoid 2121, the first attacker solenoid 2124, the second attacker solenoid 2508, and the movable stage drive motor The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol are output via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3086, and the function display substrate 640a. A drive signal is output to the memory display 643, the second special symbol memory display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, and the security display 648.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and the pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186 Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 231, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 231, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to receiving a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 231, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 461) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. When the touch operation sensor 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor is provided. When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 231, a peripheral control board 4140 for effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is sent to the lamp driving board 4160 having the first lamp driving board 3014 and the second lamp driving board 3018. Each of the decorative boards 2471, 2472, 2474, 2476, 2514, 2622, 2624, 2626, 2688, 2688, 3112, 3114, 3116, 3224, 3234, 3308, 3402, 3414, The lighting signal or the LED of 3514, 3554, 3574 A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a flashing signal is output to the lamp driving board 4160, or the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotation of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 are provided. A door frame side movable drive command that outputs a rotation drive signal to the lamp motor 285 is output to the lamp drive board 4160, or a logo left drive motor 3256, a logo right drive motor 3256, and a sort drive motor 3315 provided in the game board 4. , Rotation drive motor 3326, shutter solenoid 3331, back right drive motor 3413, back back right drive motor 3524, back back upper drive motor 3554, and back back lower drive motor 3584, a rotation drive signal is output to the game board side movable drive Commands are output to the lamp drive board 4160 or extracted from the sound ROM 4140d Control signal indicating sound information (sound command) to output to the sound source IC4140c that, the display command showing a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and outputs to the liquid crystal control circuit board 4150.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side movable driving command, game board side movable driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 4160. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 4160 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each of the decorative boards 2471, 2472, 2474, 2476, 2514, 2622 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. , 2624, 2626, 2688, 2689, 3112, 3114, 3116, 3224, 3234, 3308, 3402, 3414, 3514, 3554, 3574 and the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. To do. Further, the lamp driving board 4160 sends a rotation driving signal based on the received door frame side movable driving command to the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp motor 265 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And a logo left drive motor 3256, a logo right drive motor 3256, and a sort drive motor provided in the game board 4 with a rotation drive signal based on the received game board side movable drive command. 3315, rotation drive motor 3326, shutter solenoid 3331, back right drive motor 3413, back rear right drive motor 3524, back back upper drive motor 3554, and back back lower drive motor 3584.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes position detection sensors 3250 and 3258 for detecting the positions of the logo left decorative member 3220 and the logo right decorative member 3230 in the back upper front unit 3210 of the back movable movable effect unit 3200 of the game board 4, and the rear upper rear. Position detection sensors 3316 and 3338 for detecting the rotational positions of the seesaw member 3303 and the rotary case 3324 in the unit 3300, and position detection for detecting the slide positions of the back right decorative member 3411 and the back right character body 3412 in the back right movable effect unit 3400. Detection signals from the sensor 3422, position detection sensors 3528, 3558, 3588, etc. for detecting the turning positions of the turning decoration units 3510, 3540, 3570 in the back movable movable effect unit 3500 via the lamp driving board 4160, respectively. Based on these detection signals, a logo left decorative member 3220, a logo right decorative member 3230, a seesaw member 3303, a rotary case 3324, a back right decorative member 3411 and a back right character body 3412, a swivel decorative unit 3510, The original positions of 3540 and 3570 are grasped.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013, respectively, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 4150 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 4160. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 4160. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 through the lamp driving board 4160 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as illustrated, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, and a liquid crystal control that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the above-described liquid crystal display device 1400, character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when various kinds of people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by a main scan for setting a state and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction crossing one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 1411.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2304 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that becomes a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the above conditions, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display unit 645 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. 4206 and the normal disturbance displayed on the normal symbol display 645 by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the (normal lottery result) is “ordinary hit”, the start port solenoid 2121 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the normal stored in the normal symbol storage unit 4202 Normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of figure random numbers as a memory number on the normal symbol memory display 646 is provided.

  The above-described normal symbol holding storage means 4202 generates a predetermined number (for example, four) of random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2304 while the normal symbol display control means 4206 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until normal symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 includes a first special random number generation unit 4212, a first special symbol storage unit 4214, a first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216, a first special symbol display control unit 4218, Special symbol memory number display control means 4220. The first special random number generation means 4212 is a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3120 by the start winning to the first start port 2101. Generate special random numbers. The first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 generates the first special random number generated by the first special random number generation unit 4212 and various data acquired together with the generation of the first special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number described later, First variation pattern random numbers, second variation pattern random numbers, variation type random numbers) are temporarily stored according to predetermined conditions. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on the start winning at the first start port 2101 (for example, first special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern random number, second variation Pattern random numbers and variable type random numbers) are also called first special symbol lottery unit data. The first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 obtains a first special symbol variation pattern based on one first special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The first special symbol display control unit 4218 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 641 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216. The first special symbol memory number display control unit 4220 stores the number of first special symbol lottery unit data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol storage number). Is displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes second special random number generation means 4222, second special symbol hold storage means 4224, second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, second special symbol display control means 4228, Special symbol memory number display control means 4230. The second special random number generation means 4222 generates the second special random number based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 or the third start port sensor 2618 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. A predetermined second special random number that is the second special lottery result for the symbol is generated. The second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 has a second special random number generated by the second special random number generation unit 4222 and various data acquired together with the generation of the second special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number described later, First random number for variation pattern, second variation pattern, variation type random number) are temporarily stored according to a predetermined condition. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on start winnings at the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 (for example, second special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern) Random number, random number for second variation pattern, variation type random number) is also referred to as second special symbol lottery unit data. The second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 obtains a second special symbol variation pattern based on one second special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The second special symbol display control unit 4228 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 642 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226. The second special symbol memory number display control unit 4230 stores the number of second special symbol lottery unit data stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol storage number). And a second special symbol memory number display control means 4230 to be displayed on the second special symbol memory display 644.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. Is stored in a variable number, the first and second special symbol lottery unit data based on the start winnings to the first to third start ports 2101, 2102, 2415 are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 each). In addition, the execution of the stored first and second special symbol lottery unit data is suspended until the special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 stores the first and second special symbol lottery unit data held in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 to the start ports 2102, 2102, and 2415. Is provided with priority reservation digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special symbol lottery unit data in preference to the start winning timing of the second special symbol lottery unit data ( The lottery result hold based on the special symbol lottery unit data acquired based on winning at the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 is preferentially executed (digested).

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a lottery result (special lottery result) based on the first and second special symbol lottery unit data stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. Based on the advantageous game state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the first grand prize winning port 2103 or the second grand prize winning port 2404 is closed based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 The first opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2502 to be opened / closed is provided with a special winning opening opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2124 or the second attacker solenoid 2508 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern.

  The main control board 4100 further includes a game state control means 4236 for determining which game state the pachinko machine 1 is in, and controlling the game state based on the determined game state. .

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more external than the external normal game state (normal game state) and this external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

  The external normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the opening extension function (function in which the opening time of the movable piece 2105 is longer than normal) and the time-shortening function (function in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the special symbol is shortened) are not activated. The pair of movable pieces 2105 is in a gaming state that is not controlled by a promotion mode described later. That is, as described above, the pair of movable pieces 2105 opens and closes when the result of the normal lottery is a win, thereby enabling the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. However, as the operation mode when the movable piece 2105 operates, the first operation mode (normal mode) and the second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode. ) And are prepared.

  In the present embodiment, in the gaming state where the opening extension function and the time shortening function do not operate, as a first operation mode, the probability that the normal lottery result is won is 2%, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 sec, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 Is set to be opened once per winning with an opening time of 0.18 sec per opening. In the game state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, the second operation mode is that the probability of winning the normal lottery result is 99.6%, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 sec, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 is set to be opened 3 times per winning with an opening time of 0.95 sec per opening.

  In the external normal game state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 2105 operates. As described above, the first operation mode is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2102 is difficult to be promoted as compared to the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, and the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 2105 operate. A gaming state. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2102 is promoted.

  In the “promotion mode”, any one of the three modes of increasing the probability that the normal lottery result is won, shortening the lottery time (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), and increasing the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is selected. The promotion mode may be performed by performing only one or two, or the promotion mode may be performed by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which the probability changing function (so-called probability changing function) is activated and a gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated correspond to it.

  When the probability changing function does not operate, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a jackpot is set to a predetermined low probability (first probability: about 1/300 in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability variation function is activated, a predetermined high probability that the probability of winning the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is at least twice as large as the first probability (second probability: this implementation) In the embodiment, the second probability (about 1/30) set to 10 times the first probability is set. In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is to reduce the interest by reducing the number of fluctuations in the special symbol so that it can win the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. Further, the external advantageous gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is referred to as “external advantageous gaming state A”, and the external advantageous gaming state in which the probability varying function is activated is referred to as “external advantageous gaming state B”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B depending on the operation of the movable piece 2105. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A And the external advantageous gaming state B cannot be distinguished by the operation of the movable piece 2105.

  In addition, a change from one of the gaming states to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated based on a special lottery result. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Accordingly, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes command generation means 4238 for generating predetermined control commands such as effect commands based on the first special symbol lottery unit data and the second special symbol lottery unit data, and command generation means. Command transmission means 4240 for transmitting the command generated in 4238 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2400 flows down from the substantially left and right center to the left upper shelf member 2460 of the center accessory 2400, the left upper shelf member 2460 causes the left side of the center accessory 2400 to Guided to the area. When the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters and passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304, the game signal is based on the detection signal. In the main control board 4100, the ordinary random number generating means 4200 generates ordinary random numbers as the ordinary lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in red or green). . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, if the drawn random number is an “ordinary winning” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (the ordinary symbol display 645 emits green light), and the drawn ordinary random number is an “ordinary loss” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to the special lottery result based on the first and second special symbol lottery unit data. For example, when the special lottery result is a predetermined jackpot, the fluctuation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an area where a game ball can flow is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2400 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided. When a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2400 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate member 2300 or the warp inlet 2405. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. In addition, an upper out port 2403 is provided on the upper right side of the second big prize opening 2404 on the upper side of the center accessory 2400. When a game ball enters the upper out port 2403, it is discharged from the game area 605 as it is. Thus, when a game ball enters the upper outlet 2403, the game with the game ball ends. Accordingly, the player appropriately adjusts the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2400 and further does not enter the upper outlet 2403. It is possible to prevent a game operation by driving a pachinko machine 1 original operation handle part 461 by suppressing a game operation such as driving a game ball strongly into a dark cloud and preventing a decrease in interest. It is like that. In addition, since the upper outlet 2403 is opened on the right side upstream of the second grand prize opening 2404, even when the second big prize opening 2404 is open and can be received, the operation handle portion 461 is operated. Even in the upstream portion of the game area 605 that is relatively easy to aim at, it is possible to carefully perform the game ball driving operation.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2304 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 645 while the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2304 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 646. The normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the number of LEDs that are lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2304 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 are moved toward the center of the game area 605 below the center accessory 2400 by the shelf 2102 of the side decoration member 2100. It has become. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 disposed below the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3122, the main control board 4100 pays out a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311. To be paid out.

  It should be noted that the game balls that are driven into the game area 605 are the general prize opening 2104, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, the third start opening 2415, the first big prize opening 2103, and the second big prize opening. When no winning is made in any of 2404, the game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, even if the game ball wins any of the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, the third starting port 2415, the first major winning port 2103, and the second major winning port 2404. The winning game balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 605.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters the upper warp entrance 2405 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2400, the game ball moves to the first stage 2411 on the rear side of the stage 2410 of the center accessory 2400. It comes to be supplied. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage 2411 rolls on the first stage 2411 in the left-right direction, and is mainly discharged forward from the first guide portion 2602b. The stage 2410 of this example includes a movable stage piece 2418 that periodically advances and retreats in front of the first guide portion 2602b on the left side when viewed from the front in the first stage 2411. A game ball released from the guide portion 2602b is supplied to either the second stage 2412 or the third stage 2413.

  The game ball supplied to the second stage 2412 side by the movable stage piece 2418 rolls right on the second stage 2412 and is received as it is into the third start port 2415. When the third starting port 2415 is received and detected by the third starting port sensor 2618, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are stored from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. The tray 311 is paid out.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have not been sent to the second stage 2412 by the movable stage piece 2418 and the game balls that have been released forward from the first guide portion 2602b on the right side of the first stage 2411 are supplied onto the third stage 2413. It has come to be.

  In addition, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters the lower warp inlet 2406 that opens below the upper warp inlet 2405 on the left side of the center accessory 2400, the game ball most in the stage 2410 of the center accessory 2400 is displayed. It is supplied to the third stage 2413 on the front side.

  Then, the game ball supplied to the third stage 2413 rolls on the third stage 2413 in the left-right direction, and from above the first attacker unit 2100 from the front guide portion 2464a formed at the center in the left-right direction with high probability. The game area 605 is released. On the other hand, when the game ball rolling on the third stage 2413 is guided by the rear guide portion 2464b, the game ball enters the chance entrance 2416 opened at the rear center of the third stage 2413. The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2416 is released into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2417 that opens right above the first start opening 2101 and is received by the first start opening 2101 with a high probability. . When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3120, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the first big winning port 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2410 However, when the second starting port 2102 or the first big winning port 2103 can be received, the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2410. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 and the first grand prize winning port 2103 can have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls so that the interest can be enhanced. It has become.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, a pair of closing the second starting port 2102 is closed. When the movable piece 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and when the prize can be won, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127, the main control board A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311 via 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, a game ball wins the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the third starting port 2415, and the first starting port sensor 3120, the second starting port sensor 2127, and the third starting port 2415. When detected by the start port sensor 2618, the first start port 2101 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number by the first special random number generation means 4212, while the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 perform second generation. The special random number generation means 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the third start port 2415, the first special symbol indicator 641 is displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passing of the game ball to the gate member 2300. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 642, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is sent to the start ports 2101, 2102 and 2415. When the first start port sensor 3120, the second start port sensor 2127, and the third start port sensor 2618 are detected after winning a prize, the first start port sensor 3120, The first special symbol hold memory stores the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the second start port sensor 2127 and the third start port sensor 2618. It is stored in the stage 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 to hold the display, and the number of the stored special random numbers is stored in the first special symbol storage display 643 or the second special symbol storage. It is displayed on the display 644.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, the second special symbol lottery unit data stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority reservation digest unit 4231 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. It is executed (digested) in preference to unit data. That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit acquired based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3120, the second start port sensor 2127, and the third start port sensor 2618. Based on the special random number included in the data, it is determined whether it is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. In addition, when the determination result is “big hit”, the type of jackpot is also determined based on the first special symbol lottery unit data or the symbol random number included in the first special symbol lottery unit data. It has become. The jackpot type will be described later.

  When the determination result is “small hit” or “big hit”, the main control board 4100 is controlled by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 according to the type of the hit, and the first opening / closing member of the first attacker unit 2100 An opening / closing pattern for closing the second opening / closing member 2502 of 2106 or the second attacker unit 2500 in an open state for a predetermined time is repeated a plurality of times (for example, 15 times). Details of the opening / closing operations of the first and second opening / closing members 2106 and 2502 will be described later.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired in response to the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 variably displayed according to the one special symbol lottery unit data, the liquid crystal display device 1400 also displays the first special symbol lottery. An effect image corresponding to the unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. In other words, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result is displayed after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed according to the first special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. It has come to be. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) There are “reach per reach” and “reach lose” as modes in which this “reach effect image” is displayed. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only the effect display based on the first special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data but also the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game. It is said that.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231). The symbol variation display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the logo left decoration in the back front front unit 3210 of the movable back upper movable effect unit 3200 provided in the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. The member 3220 and the logo right decoration member 3230, the seesaw member 3303 and the rotary case 3324 in the back top rear unit 3300, the back right decoration member 3411 and the back right character body 3412 in the back right movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear movable effect unit 3500 The turning decoration units 3510, 3540, 3570 and the like are operated as appropriate, and the decoration boards 2471, 2472, 2474, 2476, 2514, 2622, 2624, 2626, 2688, 2689, 3112, 3114 provided in the game board 4 and the like are provided. 311 , And so as to properly emit light LED mounted on 3224,3234,3308,3402,3414,3514,3554,3574, so that it is possible to entertain the player by moving effect and emission effect.

[5. Control processing]
Next, various control processes executed on the main board 4000 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 253.

[5-1. About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000.

  As shown in FIG. 233, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 231) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM (data memory) of the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a to the backup area, and this power is temporarily restored when the power is restored. By reading the saved data into the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a, a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the power supply is returned to the state when the power supply is stopped according to the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Execute processing (power recovery processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is deleted. After that, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  Note that the current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 after the power is restored. In addition, the internal gaming state can be matched with the gaming state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the gaming state at the time of power failure is not stored in the peripheral control board 4140). By the way, regarding the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern to be described later is started at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, the command regarding the current gaming state is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is on. That is, even when the RAM clear switch 624a is on, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability becomes the first probability, and the control data indicating the current gaming state is the movable piece. 2105 operates in the first operation mode, and shows an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate.

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231) is activated when such an initialization process is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 (FIG. 231). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is again performed. When started, power-on processing is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the MPU mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S20, processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process for temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power interruption occurrence processing is not an interruption processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. Built in the main system process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[5-2. About power-off occurrence processing]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a is calculated, and the calculation results and various game data are stored in the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the main control MPU 4100a from accessing the RAM (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power failure, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire RAM area of the main control MPU 4100a may be a backup area in which data is backed up by always supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[5-3. About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 2304, first start port sensor 3120, second start port sensor 2127, third start port third start port sensor 2618, etc.) are monitored. Execute the process.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 645 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 2202 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2105 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process of step S100, a series of processing from the start of variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the first opening / closing member of the first attacker unit 2100 as the special electric accessory is executed. 2106 or the process for performing the opening / closing control of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is executed.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, in addition to the above-described special random numbers (first special random number and second special random number), ordinary random numbers, design random numbers, reach determination random numbers (more strictly, high Random number for expected effect determination), random number for first variation pattern, random number for second variation pattern, variation type random number, and the like.

  The special random number is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a special electric utility jackpot control process (big hit game) or a special electric bonus hitting control process (small hit game). That is, the first special random number is used to determine whether the first special lottery result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, and the second special random number is “ It is used to determine whether it is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The design random number is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is “big hit”. The determination of whether the first and second special lottery results are “big hit”, “small win”, “losing” and the type of jackpot type are “big hit”, “small hit”, and each big win The determination is made based on a hit determination table in which the winning value of the type is described. An example of the hit determination table is shown in Table 1. In the present embodiment, the first and second special random numbers take any value from 0 to 1200, and the design random number takes any value from 0 to 199.

  As can be seen from Table 1, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of whether the lottery based on the first special random number or the lottery based on the second special random number is performed. Specifically, when the probability variation function does not operate as described above, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a big hit is both set to about 1/300. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a big win is set to about 1/30). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the lottery jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number may be different from the jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number. There are six types of jackpots: jackpots A, B, C, D, E, and F.

  In the present embodiment, the selection rate of each jackpot type is different between the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number and the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the second special random number. For example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number, the selection rate of each jackpot type selected based on the symbol random number is the distribution of the symbol random numbers related to the first special symbol shown in Table 1 above. As can be calculated from the above, “big hit A” is 29%, “big hit B” is 37%, “big hit C” is 2%, “big hit D” is 21%, “big hit E” is 2%, and “big hit F” is 9%. In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the second special random number, the selection rate of each jackpot type selected based on the symbol random number is the symbol random number related to the first special symbol shown in Table 1 above. As can be calculated from the distribution of, "big hit A" is 47%, "big hit B" is 37%, "big hit C" and "big hit D" are 0% (the second special symbol does not generate big hit C, D) The “big hit E” is 5%, and the “big hit F” is 11%. Not limited to this, there is no difference in the selection rate of each jackpot type when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the first special random number and when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the second special random number Also good.

  Here, a description will be given of a small hit game that is performed when winning a small hit and a big hit game that is performed when winning big hits A to F.

  In the small hit game, the main control board 4100 performs the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 a plurality of times in a short opening / closing pattern by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 (in this embodiment, 15 times). repeat. In the short time opening / closing pattern, after the second opening / closing member 2502 is changed from the closed state to the open state, a predetermined short time (for example, 1.0 second) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are In this pattern, the second opening / closing member 2502 is closed when any of the two winning conditions 2404 is satisfied. That is, in the small hit game, when a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 in a timely manner, a small amount (for example, several tens) of prize balls are given to the player, but a large amount of prize balls (for example, 1000) Is not given to the player.

  On the other hand, the jackpot game that is played when the “bonanza A”, “jackpot B”, or “jackpot F” is won is a long-open jackpot game. In the long open jackpot game, the main control board 4100 performs the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106 of the first attacker unit 2100 by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 a plurality of times in the first long-time opening / closing pattern (in this embodiment, 15) Repeat. The first long-time opening / closing pattern indicates that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) has elapsed after the first opening / closing member 2106 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls. Is a pattern in which the first opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions for winning the first big prize opening 2103 is satisfied. In the first long opening / closing pattern, the time for which the first opening / closing member 2106 is opened is sufficiently longer than the time for which the second opening / closing member 2502 is opened in the short opening / closing pattern. That is, in the long open jackpot game, a large amount of prize balls (for example, about 1500 balls) are substantially given to the player as a privilege.

  Also, the jackpot game that is played when winning the “jackpot C” or “jackpot D” is a short-open jackpot game. In the short opening big hit game, the main control board 4100 performs the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 a plurality of times in the short opening / closing pattern described above (in this embodiment, 15 times) Repeat. That is, in the short open big hit game, as in the small hit game, when a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 in a timely manner, a small amount (for example, several tens) of the prize balls are given to the player. A large amount of prize balls (for example, 1000 balls) is not given to the player.

  Further, the jackpot game that is played when the special lottery result is won by the jackpot E is a long-opening jackpot game after a short opening. In the long open big hit game after the short opening, the main control board 4100 performs the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times (this implementation) In the embodiment, after repeating 15 times, the second long-time opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (in this embodiment, 15 times). The second long time opening / closing pattern indicates that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) has elapsed after the second opening / closing member 2502 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined number (for example, eight) of games. This is a pattern in which the second opening / closing member 2502 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions for the ball to win the second grand prize opening 2404 is satisfied. That is, in the long open big hit game after the short opening, only a small amount of prize balls (for example, dozens) are given to the player during the short opening and closing pattern, but as a privilege during the second long opening and closing pattern A large amount of prize balls (for example, about 1500 balls) are substantially given to the player.

  The operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of the “small hit” described above and the operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are the same. The person cannot determine whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, or “big hit D” only by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006. Further, the operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of “small hit”, “big hit C” and “big hit D” and the short opening / closing pattern of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of “big hit E”. The operation is the same. As a result, the player operates the second opening / closing member 2502 in a short-time opening / closing pattern to determine whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, or “big hit E”. I cannot judge while I am. That is, when the second opening / closing member 2502 operates in the short opening / closing pattern and then starts operating in the second long opening / closing pattern, the player confirms that the special lottery result is “big hit E”. It can be recognized from the operation of the member 2502. Then, after the second opening / closing member 2502 operates in the short opening / closing pattern, the player does not operate in the second long opening / closing pattern, and the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”. It can be recognized from the operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 that there is either.

  The operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of the “small hit” described above and the operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are completely the same. It is not necessary, but it is preferable to approximate to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish. Similarly, the operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of “small hit”, “big hit C”, and “big hit D” and the short time of the second opening / closing member 2502 performed in the case of “big hit E”. The operation in the opening / closing pattern may not be completely the same, but it is preferable to approximate to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish.

  As a result, if the special lottery results are “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, “big hit E”, the player wants the player to be the “big hit E” with the most profit, If it is not a “big hit E”, hope that it will be the “big hit C” or “big hit D”, which is the next largest profit after “big hit E”, and watch the change, and increase the thrill of the subsequent change. However, this is one game of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the round numbers of the first opening / closing members 2106 or the second opening / closing members 2502 of all jackpot games are the same (15 times), and no round display lamp is provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to identify whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, or “big hit E”. Can do.

  The ordinary random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to be in an open state. The ordinary random number takes a value of 0 to 250 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the ordinary random number is set to 246 to 250 in the case of the external normal gaming state, and 1 to 250 in the case of the external advantageous gaming state. Is set. The random number for reach determination determines whether or not to perform high-expected effects such as reach effects when the special lottery result is “losing” (not “big win” or “small win”) (high-expected effect lottery) ) Is a random number used. The reach determination random number takes a value of 0 to 138 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the reach determination random number is set to 0 to 7 in the first special lottery and is set to 0 to 6 in the second special lottery. The The random number for the first variation pattern and the random number for the second variation pattern are the variation patterns of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 corresponding to the first and second lottery results. This is a random number used for determining the change pattern of the effect image and the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 corresponding to the determination and the first and second lottery results. In the present embodiment, the first variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 99, and the second variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 199. Therefore, the number of combinations of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern random number is 100 × 200 = 20000. The variation type random number is used to determine the type of variation pattern (as will be described later, in this embodiment, there are usually five types of variation types of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 5). It is a random number. In the present embodiment, the variable type random number takes a value of 0 to 199 (total number 200).

  It should be noted that the effect image and the decorative pattern variation pattern that are display-controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be determined by the first and second variation pattern random numbers, and the peripheral mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4140 of the peripheral substrate 4010. It may be determined by the control MPU 4140a or the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a mounted on the liquid crystal control board 4150 (see FIG. 231). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, the winning random number update process updates special random numbers, design random numbers, and ordinary random numbers. Here, the special random number, the design random number, and the ordinary random number are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing this, the probability (probability determined to generate “big hit” or “small hit”, probability to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is made constant. That is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased by aiming or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific player who makes a hit or the like from being in an advantageous state compared to other players, and to suppress unfairness among the players.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of “big hit” or “small win” and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. The random numbers updated on the main control board 4100 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, the initial value of the special random number that starts counting next when the counter that updates the special random number makes one round. The initial value determination random number and the like are also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring a special random number, two first special random number acquisition means 4212 for generating a first special random number and second special random number acquisition means 4222 for generating a second special random number are provided. Although means are provided, a configuration in which only one of them is provided may be employed.

[5-4. About special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, a start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been received by the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the third start port 2415, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked, and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed (step S120 to step S230).

  When the start opening winning process (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not “big hit” or “small win” has been won, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, a decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and an effect variation pattern are determined, and the variation The time of change set in accordance with the pattern (the time from the start of the change display of the special symbol in either the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 to the stop display) is used as a timer. Set and update the processing flag to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined to be “big hit” in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined to be “small hit”, the process is selected. The flag is updated to “4”, and if neither the big hit or the small hit is determined (losing), the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot F) is determined, and the first opening / closing member 2106 of the first attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member of the second attacker unit 2500 is determined according to the jackpot type. The number of rounds for controlling the opening / closing operation of 2502, the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded are set, and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the small hitting establishment process (step S220) is executed. In the small hitting establishment process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility big hit control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the first opening / closing member 2106 of the first attacker unit 2100, based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded, or When the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is controlled and the jackpot game is ended, whether or not to operate the probability variation function and whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is set as an acceleration mode. And a process of updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is based on the number of opening times, the opening time, and the limited number set in the small hitting establishment process (step S220). Is controlled (execution of the small hit game), and when the special electric accessory small hit control process ends, a process of updating the processing flag to “0” is performed. Note that the small hit game performed in the special electric utility small hit control process is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but as described above, the short hit big hit game which is a kind of the big hit game and the pole It is a similar game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[5-5. About the starting prize winning process]
Next, the start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start opening winning process.

In the starting port winning process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 (step S1101).
). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 2012 or the third start port sensor 2618 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012 or the third start port sensor 2618, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 (YES in step S1101). ). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012 or the third start port sensor 2618, it is determined that no game ball is won in the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 (NO in step S1101). .

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, second special symbol lottery unit data is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the number of holdings in the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the main control MPU 4100a performs a second holding storage process (step S1103). The process proceeds to step S1104. In the second reserved memory process, the process of storing the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 in the second special symbol storing unit 4224 is mainly used. Done.

  When the second reserved storage process is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes a second special symbol preceding process (step S1104).

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing process steps of the second special symbol preceding process. The second special symbol predecessor process is the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 that triggered the second special symbol lottery unit data (second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed) acquired in the previous step S1103. In this process, a winning notification command for notifying the winning of a game ball (step S1101) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  When the second special symbol preceding process is started, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is in a non-variable state (step S11041). In the non-variable state, the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed has the second special symbol holding number “0”, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are currently fluctuating. There is no state. When determining that the main control MPU 4100a is in a non-fluctuating state (step S11041: YES), the main control MPU 4100a transmits a first type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11042), and ends the second special symbol advance processing.

  When determining that the main control MPU 4100a is not in the non-fluctuating state (step S11041: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the big hit game is being played (step S11044). When the main control MPU 4100a determines that the game is a big hit game (step S11044: YES), it transmits a first type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11042), and ends the second special symbol advance processing. The first type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed has a second special symbol holding number of “0”, and either the first special symbol or the second special symbol varies ( In the case of the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball, the first type winning notification command is “6302”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol hold number is “1”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6303”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol holding number is “2”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6304”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol hold number is “3”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6305”. Note that the command “6301” is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the second special symbol hold count becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the game is not a big hit game (step S11044: NO), the main control MPU 4100a executes a preceding determination process for performing determination as shown in the preceding determination table based on the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. (Step S11045).

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating a preceding determination table. The upper table in FIG. 239 shows a preceding determination table representing determination in the preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data, and the lower table in FIG. 239 is a preceding determination based on the second special symbol lottery unit data. The precedence determination table showing the determination in a process is shown. FIG. 239 shows a preceding determination table used when the probability changing function is not operating. When the probability variation function is in operation, special random number values are distributed (normal random numbers, one random variation per probability variation, and two random numbers per probability variation increase, and random numbers distributed to normal lose, reach A, and reach B decrease. The illustrations are omitted because they are the same except that they are different.

  In the preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data, for example, as shown in the lower table of FIG. 239, the value of the second special random number in the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is “0”. ˜500, 505 to 1196 ”and the value of the reach determination random number is“ 7 to 238 ”, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it is“ ordinary loss ”. The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “ordinary loss” in this process is the second special lottery result when the second special symbol lottery unit data is to be processed later in the variation start process. Will be “lost” and the reach lottery result will also be “lost”.

  The preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data is a jackpot lottery based on the second special symbol lottery unit data to be performed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process, which will be described later, and an effect lottery (determination of the variation pattern). The second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 that triggered the acquisition of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed prior to the start of the change start process and change pattern setting process described later. This process is executed immediately after a game ball is won.

  In the preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data, as the preceding determination result, for example, “normal lose”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “small hit”, “normal hit”, “per probability change 1” ”Or“ 2 per probability variation ”.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “ordinary loss” in this process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The two special lottery results will be “losing” and the reach lottery result will be “losing”.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “reach A” in this process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The two special lottery results will be “losing”, the reach lottery result will be “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively low expectation level of the big hit will be selected.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data that is determined to be “reach B” in this process will be processed when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed later in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The two special lottery results will be “losing”, the reach lottery result will be “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively high expectation level of the big hit will be selected.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “ordinary hit” in this process is the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed later in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The result of the 2 special lottery will be “big hit B”.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “1 per probability variation” in the present process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The result of the second special lottery will be “big hit A” or “big hit F”.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “2 per probability variation” in the present process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The result of the second special lottery will be “big hit E”.

  When the preceding determination process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a second type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 according to the processing result of the preceding determination process (step S11046), and ends the second special symbol preceding process. To do. Here, the second type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and a command indicating the determination result in the preceding determination process. . Note that, unlike the second type winning notification command, the first type winning notification command described above indicates only the number of reserved storage in which the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is stored. Judgment results are not shown.

  As will be understood from the above description, each time a game ball wins the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, immediately after the winning is detected, either the first type win notification command or the second type win notification command Is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. Among these, the second type winning notification command indicating the processing result of the preceding determination processing is performed in winning when the jackpot game is not being played and when it is not changing. Accordingly, for the second special symbol, the second type winning notification command is transmitted in all the game states of the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, the external advantageous game state A, and the external advantageous game state B.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1101 that the game ball has not won the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 (step S1101: NO), and in step S1102, the second special symbol holding storage means. When it is determined that the number of holdings 4224 has reached the upper limit of 4 (step S1102: NO), and when the second special symbol preceding process ends, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2101 (step S1105). Specifically, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3115 is confirmed. At this time, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 3115, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 2101 (step S1105: YES). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 3115, it is determined that no game ball is won in the first start port 2101 (step S1105: NO).

  When it is determined in step S1105 that a game ball has won the first start opening 2101, first special symbol lottery unit data is acquired, and the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4 Whether or not (step S1106).

  If it is determined in step S1106 that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1106: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs a first hold storage process (step S1107). In the first hold storage process, a process of storing the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the first start port 2101 in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is mainly performed. As with the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball at the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, the first acquired by the game ball winning at the first start port 2101. One special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214. When the first hold storage process is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes a first special symbol advance process (step S1108).

  FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing process steps of the first special symbol preceding process. In the first special symbol predecessor process, a game ball is awarded to the first start port 2101 triggered by the first special symbol lottery unit data (first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed) acquired in the previous step S1106. In this process, a winning notification command for notifying (Step S1105) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  When the first special symbol preceding process is started, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is an acceleration mode (step S11081).

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines that the movable piece 2105 is in the promotion mode (step S11081: YES), the main control MPU 4100a transmits a first type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11082), and performs the first special symbol advance processing. finish. The first type winning notification command transmitted here is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed has the first special symbol holding number “0” and is in a fluctuating state, the first special symbol lottery unit data is based on the winning game ball. In the case of special symbol lottery unit data, the first type winning notification command is “6202”.

  In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the first special symbol hold number is “1”, the first type prize winning unit The notification command is “6203”. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the game ball won when the first special symbol hold number is “2”, the first type winning notification The command is “6204”. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the game ball won when the first special symbol hold number is “3”, the first type winning notification The command is “6205”. Note that the command “6201” is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the number of first special symbol reservations becomes “0”.

  The winning notification command transmitted when the processing target is the first special symbol lottery unit data is sent from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 immediately after the winning based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. It can be said that it is a command to be transmitted. The winning notification command transmitted when the processing target is the second special symbol lottery unit data is based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 and immediately after the winning. It can also be said that the command is transmitted from the control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the movable piece 2105 is not in the promotion mode (step S11081: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is in a non-variable state (step S11083). When determining that the main control MPU 4100a is in a non-fluctuating state (step S11083: YES), the main control MPU 4100a transmits the first type winning notification command described above to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11082), and ends the first special symbol advance processing. To do.

  When determining that the main control MPU 4100a is not in a non-fluctuating state (step S11083: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S11084). If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the game is a jackpot game (step S11084: YES), the first type winning notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11082), and the first special symbol advance processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the game is not a big hit game (step S11084: NO), the main control MPU 4100a executes a preceding determination process for determining as shown in the preceding determination table based on the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. (Step S11085).

  In the preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data, for example, as shown in the upper table of FIG. 239, among the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, the value of the first special random number is “0 to 0”. 500, 510 to 1196 ", and the reach determination random number is" 8 to 238 ", the main control MPU 4100a determines that" normally lost ". The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “usually lost” in this process is the first special lottery result when the first special symbol lottery unit data is to be processed later in the variation start process. Will be “lost” and the reach lottery result will also be “lost”.

  The preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data is a jackpot lottery based on the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process, which will be described later, and an effect lottery (determination of the variation pattern). A part or all of the game balls are awarded to the first start opening 2101 that triggered the acquisition of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed prior to the start of the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing described later. This process is executed immediately after.

  In the preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data, as the preceding determination result, for example, “normal lose”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “small hit”, “normal hit”, “per probability change 1” ”Or“ 2 per probability variation ”.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “ordinary loss” in this process will be processed when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed later in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. One special lottery result will be “losing” and the reach lottery result will be “losing”.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data that is determined to be “reach A” in this process is the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed later in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. One special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively low expectation level of the big hit is selected.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “reach B” in this process is the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed later in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. One special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively high expectation level of the big hit is selected.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “usually winning” in this process is the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. One special lottery result will be a “big hit B”.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “1 per probability variation” in the present process will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The result of the first special lottery will be “big hit A” or “big hit F”.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “2 per probability variation” in the present process will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The result of the first special lottery is any one of “big hit C”, “big hit D”, and “big hit E”.

  When the preceding determination process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a second type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 according to the processing result of the preceding determination process (step S11086), and ends the first special symbol preceding process. To do. Here, the second type winning notification command transmitted in this step is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and at the same time, the determination in the preceding determination process This command shows the result.

  As will be understood from the above description, whenever a game ball wins at the first start port 2101, either the first type winning notification command or the second type winning notification command is sent from the main control MPU 4100 a immediately after detection of the winning. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Among these, the second type winning notification command indicating the processing result of the preceding determination processing is performed only for winning when the jackpot game is not being performed and when the movable piece 2105 is operating in the normal mode. Accordingly, for the first special symbol, the second type winning notification command is transmitted substantially in the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B in which the movable piece 2105 is operating in the normal advance mode. It is when is done.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the first type winning notification command or the second type winning notification command controls the hold display based on the winning notification command immediately after the reception. That is, when the value of the second digit from the top of the winning notification command is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a winning (first special symbol lottery unit data of the first special symbol lottery unit data). If the value of the second digit from the top of the winning notification command is “3”, the winning notification command is sent to the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. It is recognized that the command is based on winning (acquiring second special symbol lottery unit data). Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a recognizes the number of pending displays to be displayed based on the first digit value from the bottom of the winning notification command.

  Specifically, for example, the first type winning notification command will be described as an example. When the first type winning notification command is “6202”, the fact that there is one reserved memory for the first special symbol is displayed on hold. To do. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6203”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are two suspending memories for the first special symbol. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6204”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are three reserved memories for the first special symbol, and the first type winning notification command is “6205”. If it is, the fact that there are four reserved memories for the first special symbol is displayed on hold.

  If the first type winning notification command is “6302”, the fact that there is one reserved memory for the second special symbol is displayed on hold. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6303”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are two suspending memories for the second special symbol. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6304”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays that there are three reserved memories for the second special symbol, and the first type winning notification command is “6305”. If it is, the fact that there are four reserved memories for the second special symbol is displayed on hold. When the second type winning notification command is received, the second digit value and the lower first digit from the top of the second type winning notification command are the same as when the first type winning notification command is received. Based on the value, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the hold display.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the second type winning notification command has the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the second type winning notification command based on the received second type winning notification command. Even though the special symbol lottery unit data is held, the lottery result (including the special lottery result and the reach lottery result) based on the special symbol lottery unit data can be roughly recognized in advance. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the lottery result recognized by the second type winning notification command, so that a lottery based on the special symbol lottery unit data is held in advance even though some special symbol lottery unit data is held. An effect reflecting the result (so-called pre-reading effect) can be performed. Details of the prefetch effect will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 237, the description will be continued. When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1105 that a game ball has not won the first start port 2101 (step S1105: NO), and in step S1106, the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is the upper limit. When it is determined that the value of 4 has been reached (step S1106: NO) and when the first special symbol preceding process is completed, the start opening winning process is terminated.

  According to the first special symbol preceding process of the start opening winning process described above, the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state in the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, and the first special symbol. When the number of reserved storages of the lottery unit data is 1 to 3, when a game ball is won at the first start port 2101, a preceding determination process is performed immediately after winning a prize and a preceding determination process result is awarded to the peripheral control board 4140. Send every time. As described above, the preceding determination result indicates in advance a result when the first special symbol lottery unit data is the target of the special lottery and the reach lottery at the start of fluctuation. Then, it is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to actually perform the prefetching effect and what kind of prefetching effect to perform. In addition, the second special symbol is in a fluctuating state in the external advantageous gaming state A and the external advantageous gaming state B, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol lottery unit data is 1 to 3. When a game ball wins at the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, a predetermination process is performed immediately after winning a prize, and a predetermination process result is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 for each win. Then, it is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to actually perform the prefetching effect and what kind of prefetching effect to perform.

  Conventionally, in the main control MPU 4100a, a predetermination process is performed, it is determined whether or not a prefetch effect is to be performed, and if it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed, a command instructing the prefetch effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It was. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command for instructing a prefetch effect, the peripheral control board 4140 performs the prefetch effect according to the command. When preparing a plurality of types of pre-reading effects, it is also necessary to determine the types of pre-reading effects in the main control MPU 4100a and to transmit a command for designating the pre-reading effects by designating the type to the peripheral control board 4140. there were. For this reason, when changing the pre-reading effect specifications, such as changing the execution frequency of the pre-reading effect, adding a type of pre-reading effect, or changing the big hit expectation when the pre-reading effect is performed, Not only the control program of the MPU 4140a but also the control program of the main control MPU 4100a is inevitably changed, which may prolong the development period and complicate the development work.

  However, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a only determines in advance the results of the special lottery and the reach lottery, and transmits the results to the peripheral control board 4140. It is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to perform and what kind of pre-reading effect to perform. For this reason, when changing the pre-reading effect specifications, such as changing the execution frequency of the pre-reading effect, adding a type of pre-reading effect, or changing the big hit expectation when the pre-reading effect is performed, Since only the control program of the MPU 4140a needs to be changed, the development period can be prolonged and the development work can be facilitated.

  In step S1102, when the number of holds in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is the upper limit when the game ball wins the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, the second acquired in step S1101. Discard the special symbol lottery unit data. Similarly, in step S1106, the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired in step S1104 when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is the upper limit when a game ball wins the first start port 2101. Is discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415, the acquisition of the second special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S1101, but in steps S1101 to S1103. You can do it in between. For example, the second special symbol lottery unit data is not acquired in step S1101 and the second special symbol lottery unit data is determined in step S1102 after determining that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit value. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the second reserved storage process in step S1103.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won the first start port 2101, the acquisition of the first special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S 1105, and may be performed between steps S 1105 to S 1107. . For example, without acquiring the first special symbol lottery unit data in step S1105, the first special symbol lottery unit data is determined in step S1106 after determining that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit value. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the first reserved storage process in step S1107.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (step S1101 to step S1104) to the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415, the winning process to the first starting port 2101 (step S1105). 1108). However, instead of this, after the winning process to the first starting port 2101 is executed, the winning process to the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 may be executed.

[5-6. About change start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is zero. (Step S1301).

  If the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is not 0 (step S1301: NO), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the second special symbol storage unit 4224. (Step S1302). As described above, the second special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  On the other hand, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is 0 (step S1301: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is 0. Is determined (step S1303).

  If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is not 0 (step S1303: NO), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. (Step S1304). As described above, the first special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  As will be understood from the above description, the special symbol lottery unit data is stored (held) in the special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224 until the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. It can be seen that it is subject to processing (subsequently, subject to jackpot lottery etc.). In the present embodiment, the start condition for the second special symbol lottery unit data is the other second special symbol lottery unit data held prior to the second special symbol lottery unit data at the time when the variation start process is performed. There is no. In addition, the start condition for the first special symbol lottery unit data is that there is no second special symbol lottery unit data being held at the time when the change start process is performed, and the first special symbol lottery unit data There is no other first special symbol lottery unit data previously suspended.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations in first special symbol storage unit 4214 is 0 (YES in step S1301), main control MPU 4100a ends the variation start process.

  When the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data, the main control MPU 4100a is in a gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is activated. Whether or not (step S1305). Here, if it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1305), the hit determination table at the time of high probability is selected from the hit determination table (step S1306).

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1305 (NO in step S1305), the normal hit determination table is selected from the hit determination tables (step S1307).

  A special random number (first special random number) included in the determination table selected in step S1306 or step S1307 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data or second special symbol lottery unit data). Or the second special random number), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S1308).

  If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a big hit (YES in step S1308), the main control MPU 4100a wins a big hit based on the symbol random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed The type is determined (step S1309). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (step S1310). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a sets the jackpot A flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot A, sets the jackpot B flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot B, and the jackpot type is jackpot C If the jackpot C flag is ON, if the jackpot type is jackpot D, the jackpot D flag is turned ON. If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the jackpot E flag is turned ON and the jackpot type is jackpot If it is F, the big hit F flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a updates the processing flag to “1” (step S1313), and ends the variation start processing.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines that it is not a big win in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the determination table shown in Table 1 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data) Alternatively, based on the special random number (the first special random number or the second special random number) included in the second special symbol lottery unit data), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step S1311). If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a small hit (YES in step S1311), the main control MPU 4100a sets the small hit flag to ON (step S1312), and proceeds to step S1313. Then, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is not a small hit (NO in step S1311), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S1313, updates the processing flag to “1”, and changes End the start process.

[5-7. About variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to a special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit, loss). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is in an ON state, or whether or not a jackpot flag is in an ON state (step S1510). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1510: YES), hit variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S1520), and then variation pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON in step S1510 (step S1510: NO), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big win should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should be performed (step S1530: YES), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high degree of expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (step S1530: NO), a low disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the variation pattern table setting processing per low-expected failure and the variation type is determined for the determined variation pattern. Is done.

  Whether or not the high expectation effect should be performed is determined to be a high expectation effect if the reach determination random number described above is won in the high expectation effect lottery, and it has been lost in the high expectation effect lottery. Therefore, it is determined that the high expectation production is not performed. The high expectation effect lottery is performed using the reach determination random number included in the acquired special symbol lottery unit data to be processed when the symbol change is started when the special lottery result is lost. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on whether the game is in the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold. For example, in the case of an external normal gaming state and the change is a change in the first special symbol, if the first special symbol hold number is 0, 10.5, the first special symbol hold number is If it is 1, it may be 1/12, if the first special symbol reservation number is 2, it may be 13.5, and if the first special symbol reservation number is 3, it may be 1/15. In the case of an external normal gaming state) and the change is a change in the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 10.5 if the number of second special symbol hold is zero. 1/2, if the second special symbol hold number is 1, 1/12, if the second special symbol hold number is 2, 13.5, if the second special symbol hold number is 3, then 15 It may be a fraction. In the case of an external advantageous game state, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery may always be 1/14 regardless of the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, a value representing the combination of the determined variation pattern and variation type is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the combination of the variation pattern and variation type is supported. The variable time value to be set is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, the fluctuation time value is set in advance for each combination of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation type. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  A plurality of LEDs are lit in a predetermined lighting pattern on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 based on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process.

[5-8. Hit variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 243 and 244. FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 244 is a table showing distribution of tables to be set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 243, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15201). As described above, there are four types of game states: the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, the external advantageous game state A, and the external advantageous game state B. For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the hit type (step S15202). The hit type is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a as described above. For example, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes which of the jackpot A flag, jackpot B flag, jackpot C flag, jackpot D flag, jackpot E flag, jackpot flag F, and jackpot flag is on. Recognize whether the jackpot is A to F or the jackpot. Next, the main control MPU 4100a selects a winning variation pattern setting table based on the gaming state, the winning type, and the first changing pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S15203). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the hit variation pattern table has 16 types of A to P as shown in FIG. One of the winning variation pattern tables A to P is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the winning type, and the first changing pattern random number. For example, as shown in FIG. 244, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is a jackpot A, the total number of first variation patterns is 100 (0 to 99). Of the random numbers, 80 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table A, and 20 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table B. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, the win fluctuation pattern table setting process has a probability of 80/100 in the win fluctuation pattern table setting process. A is selected, and the hit variation pattern table B is selected with a probability of 20/100. When the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, a table other than the win fluctuation pattern tables A and B is selected in the win fluctuation pattern table setting process. Never happen.

  As shown in FIG. 244, when the hit type is jackpot F, the same hit variation pattern table is used as when the game state is the same and the hit type is jackpot B. Thereby, when winning the jackpot F, the same effect (variation pattern) as when winning the jackpot B is realized. In this way, when winning the jackpot F (probability change function is activated), since the same effect as when winning the jackpot B (probability change function is not activated) is performed, the player saw the effect Alone, it is difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot is F or jackpot B. Thus, the player can enjoy the production while expecting that the jackpot F is greater than the jackpot B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 244, the external advantageous gaming state B is divided into two cases. They are the case after jackpot F (when the previous jackpot is jackpot F) and other cases. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B (after the jackpot F), the same variation pattern table is used as when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A. As a result, during a game in the external advantageous gaming state B (with high probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot F, it is the same as during a game in the external advantageous gaming state A (with a low probability of short time) that transitions after the jackpot B Production (variation pattern) is realized. As a result, even if the player observes the effect realized after the jackpot game, it is difficult to distinguish whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot F or the jackpot B. Thus, the player can enjoy the production while expecting that the jackpot F is greater than the jackpot B. However, in the present embodiment, the period during which the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is maintained in the promotion mode differs between when the jackpot B is won and when the jackpot F is won. When the jackpot B is won, the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is changed from the promotion mode to the normal mode when the symbol change (lottery) is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the next jackpot. . On the other hand, when the jackpot F is won, the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is maintained in the promotion mode until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, the player can determine the big hit B and the big hit F by confirming the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 when the above-mentioned symbol variation (lottery) of the number of operations is performed without winning the next big hit. Can be distinguished. The main control MPU 4100a specifies the last jackpot type using a flag representing the last jackpot type.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern table is different between the case where the first special symbol lottery unit data is the processing target and the case where the second special symbol lottery unit data is the processing target. Is provided. That is, for example, in the variation pattern table A in FIG. 244, the table A1 selected when the first special symbol lottery unit data is the processing target and the second special symbol lottery unit data are the processing targets. Table A2 selected in this case. As a result, even if a game is being played in the same game state (either the external normal game state A or B and the external advantageous game state A or B), the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed. Different effects can be executed depending on whether the second special symbol lottery unit data is a processing target. This is the same for all the variation pattern tables A to Z, AA, and BB shown in FIGS. 244, 246, and 248. In addition, the example (FIGS. 249 to 252) of the variation pattern table described later represents a table selected when the first special symbol lottery unit data is a processing target. The illustration of the variation pattern table in the case where the second special symbol lottery unit data is a processing target is omitted.

[5-9. Highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 245 and 246. FIG. 245 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 246 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the high expectation disappointment variation pattern table setting process.

  In the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 245, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15401). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a selects a highly disappointing variation pattern setting table based on the gaming state and the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S15402), and disappoints. The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 246, there are four types of high-expected disappointment variation pattern tables, Q to T. Any of the high-expectation variation pattern tables Q to T is associated with the combination of the gaming state and the first variation pattern random number. For example, as shown in FIG. 246, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, 95 values out of a total of 100 (0 to 99) random numbers for the first variation pattern The high expectation loss variation pattern table Q is associated, and five values are associated with the high expectation loss variation pattern table R. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table Q is selected with a probability of 95/100 in the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process, The highly disappointing variation pattern table R is selected with a probability of 5/100. In the case of the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, tables other than the high anticipation loss variation pattern tables Q and R are not selected in the high anticipation loss variation pattern table setting process.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 246, the external advantageous gaming state B is divided into two cases. They are the case after jackpot F (when the previous jackpot is jackpot F) and other cases. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B (after the jackpot F), the same variation pattern table is used as when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A. As a result, during a game in the external advantageous game state B (with high probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot F, it is the same as during a game in the external advantageous game state A (with a low probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot B Production (variation pattern) is realized. As a result, even if the player observes the effect realized after the jackpot game, it is difficult to distinguish whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot F or the jackpot B. Thus, the player can enjoy the production while expecting that the jackpot F is greater than the jackpot B.

[5-10. About low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the low-expectation variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 248 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  In the low-expected variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 247, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15501). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing of the unprocessed special symbol lottery unit data excluding the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed in the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs. The number, that is, the remaining number of holdings is recognized (step S15502). For example, when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, if the number of reserved special symbols is 4, the remaining number of reserved is 3. Further, if the number of reserved special symbols is 3 when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, the remaining number of reserved is 2. The main control MPU 4100a decreases the number based on the gaming state, the remaining number of reserved special symbols to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs, and the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. An unexpected disappointment variation pattern setting table is selected (step S15503), and the low anticipation variation pattern table setting processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, there are eight types of low expected disappointment variation pattern tables: U to Z, AA, and BB. One of the low-expected variation pattern tables U to Z, AA, and BB is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the number of remaining reserved symbols for the special symbol to be processed, and the first variation pattern random number.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 248, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the total number of 100 (0 to 99) according to the remaining number of holds 0, 1, 2, 3 All the random numbers for the first variation pattern are associated with the low-expected variation pattern tables U, V, W, and X, respectively. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the low expected disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed according to the remaining numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3 of the first special symbol. , The low-expected fluctuation pattern tables U, V, W, and X are selected with a probability of 100%, and the other low-expected fluctuation pattern tables are not selected.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 248, the external advantageous gaming state B is divided into two cases. They are the case after jackpot F (when the previous jackpot is jackpot F) and other cases. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B (after the jackpot F), the same variation pattern table is used as when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A. As a result, during a game in the external advantageous game state B (with high probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot F, it is the same as during a game in the external advantageous game state A (with a low probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot B Production (variation pattern) is realized. As a result, even if the player observes the effect realized after the jackpot game, it is difficult to distinguish whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot F or the jackpot B. Thus, the player can enjoy the production while expecting that the jackpot F is greater than the jackpot B.

  In the low-expected deviation pattern table setting process, the low-expected fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the remaining number of holdings is large is generally low-expected fluctuation that is selected when the remaining number of holdings is small. Compared with the pattern table, a variation pattern with a short variation time of the special symbol is described, and when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is small, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time. Fluctuation display is performed.

  As can be seen from FIGS. 244, 246, and 248 described above, the same variation pattern table is selected when the jackpot B is won and when the jackpot F is won. In addition, the same variation pattern table is selected during the game in the external advantageous gaming state A (with a low probability of short time) that transitions after the jackpot B and the external advantageous gaming state B (with a high probability of short time) that transitions after the jackpot F. It has become so. As a result, it is the same in the game in the external advantageous gaming state A (with a low probability of short time) that shifts after the jackpot B and in the game in the external advantageous gaming state B (with a high probability of short time) that transitions after the jackpot F Production is realized. As a result, when the player wins either the jackpot B or the jackpot F, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the probability changing function is operating in the external advantageous gaming state after the jackpot. Thus, the player can enjoy the production while expecting that the jackpot F is greater than the jackpot B.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table. FIG. 249 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables A and B that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 250 is a list of variation patterns determined based on the hit variation pattern tables C to P that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 251 is a list of variation patterns determined on the basis of the high-expected loss variation pattern tables Q to T that can be selected in the high-expected loss variation pattern setting process. FIG. 252 is a list of variation patterns determined based on the low-expected variation pattern tables U to Z, AA, and BB that can be selected in the low-expected variation pattern setting process. FIGS. 249 to 252 also show the distribution of variation patterns determined based on each variation pattern table.

  Each variation pattern table A to Z, AA, BB, and CC associates a total number of 200 (0 to 199) second variation pattern random numbers with each variation pattern. Then, the main control MPU 4100a uses the set variation pattern table to display the variation pattern associated with the second variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed as the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. The variation pattern in the variation corresponding to is determined. Further, when the variation pattern is determined, main control MPU 4100a determines the variation type for each variation pattern based on the variation type random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. As will be described later, there are usually five types of variation types, ie, 2, 3, 4, and 5. In FIGS. 249 to 252, distribution of variation types for each variation pattern is also shown. Yes.

  For example, when the set variation pattern table is A, as shown in FIG. 249, numbers 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25 , 27, and 28 to any one of the variation patterns, 3/200, 20/200, 4/200, 5/200, 6/200, 25/200, 30/200, 3/200, 15/200, 3/200, 12/200, 12/200, 23/251, 1/200, 10/200, 2/200, 13/200, It will be determined with the probability of.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 249, when the variation pattern of number 20 (per live-action reach A) is selected, the variation type is “normal” with a probability of 60/200 and a probability of 30/200. Is determined to be “2 stations”, with a probability of 90/200, “3 stations”, with a probability of 15/200, “4 stations”, and with a probability of 5/200, “5 stations”. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 252, when the set fluctuation pattern table is X, the fluctuation pattern of number 253 (normal fluctuation (holding 3)) is selected with a probability of 100%. Note that the variation type of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern tables U to Z, AA, and BB shown in FIG. 252 is determined as “normal” with a probability of 100%. The distribution is not shown.

  When the variation pattern and the corresponding variation type are determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern and variation type, and a lottery result (lost, A command (also referred to as “hit type information”) indicating jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F) is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral board 4010. It is used for processing such as effect lottery by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. That is, the decorative symbol variation display and effect display (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are actually commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 within the peripheral board 4010. It is decided according to. In this sense, the control related to the variation display and the effect display of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed in cooperation with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral board 4010 (display control means).

[5-11. About processing during change]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (step S1801: NO), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is fluctuating (step S1801: YES), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether the fluctuating time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the variation processing is terminated as it is (step S1802: NO). When the fluctuation time elapses (step S1802: YES), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is derived and displayed on the changing display unit of the first special symbol display unit 641 or the second special symbol display unit 642.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the big hit flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1806). That is, as a result of stopping the current fluctuation and deriving the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to start the special electric accessory small hit control process. If the small hit flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the small hit flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[5-12. About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In the jackpot game start process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Since the probability changing function is not activated when the jackpot game is being executed, the main control MPU 4100a stops the operation of the probability varying function when the probability varying function is activated (step S2002), and proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability changing function is not operating (step S2001: NO), the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2002 and proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is an acceleration mode. Since the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is set to the normal mode when the jackpot game is being executed, the main control MPU 4100a sets the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 to the normal mode when the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is the promotion mode. The mode is changed (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, when the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is the normal mode in step S2003 (step S2003: NO), the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2004 and proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the jackpot type with reference to the jackpot flag, and the first opening / closing member 2106 of the first attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member of the second attacker unit 2500 according to the jackpot type. An opening / closing pattern 2502 is set. For example, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B”, in order to realize the first long-time opening / closing pattern described above, the first number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the first attacker unit 2100 per round The maximum opening time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) and the maximum winning number (for example, 8 balls) of the opening / closing member 2106 are set. Then, after that, the process proceeds to step S2006, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

[5-13. About processing when small hits are established]
Next, based on FIG. 255, the process at the time of small hit establishment is demonstrated. FIG. 255 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a small hit is established. In the small hitting establishment process, first, the opening / closing pattern of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is set to the opening / closing pattern for small hitting (in this embodiment, as described above, the short opening / closing pattern). Specifically, in order to realize a short-time opening / closing pattern, the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), the opening time (for example, 1.0 second) of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 per time, and the maximum A winning number (for example, two balls) is set (step S2201). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “6”, and the process when the small hit is established is ended (step S2202).

[5-14. Special electric utility jackpot control process]
Next, based on FIG. 256, a special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the main control MPU 4100a firstly opens / closes an operation target opening / closing member determined according to the type of jackpot (the first opening / closing member 2106 of the first attacker unit 2100 or the second attacking unit 2500). It is determined whether or not the opening / closing member 2502 is being opened (step S2401). If the opening / closing member to be operated is being opened (step S2401: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing member has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2005 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member has elapsed (step S2402: YES), the opening / closing member 2106 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing member has not elapsed in step S2402 (step S2402: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the game ball with the maximum number of winnings set in advance is opened / closed by the opening / closing member (the first prize opening) It is determined whether or not it has been received at the first big prize opening 2103 of one attacker unit 2100 or the second big prize opening 2404 of the second attacker unit 2500 (step S2403). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the count value by the count sensor arranged at the big prize opening has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2005. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the maximum number of game balls has been received in the big prize opening (step S2403: YES), the main control MPU 4100a closes the opening / closing member and ends the special electric utility jackpot control process. To do. On the other hand, if the maximum number of game balls has not been received in the special winning opening (step 2403: NO), the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If the opening / closing member is not open (step S2401: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a preset round number has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2005 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (step S2405: YES), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2408, where a big hit flag (big hit A flag, big hit B flag, big hit C flag, big hit D flag, Of the big hit E flag and big hit F flag, the flag that is in the ON state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (step S2405: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time between rounds (interval between rounds) has elapsed (step S2406). When main control MPU 4100a determines that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S2406: NO), it terminates the special electric utility jackpot control process as it is. If it is determined that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S2406: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs the opening process of the opening / closing member 2106 (step S2407), and ends the special electric accessory big hit control process.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2408, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2409). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2410). Specifically, if the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2408 is one of the jackpot A flag, jackpot C flag, jackpot D flag, jackpot E flag, jackpot F flag, the main control MPU 4100a Activate the probability variation function. That is, among the above jackpots A to F, jackpots A, C, D, E, and F are so-called probability variation jackpots in which the probability change function is activated after the jackpot game, and jackpot B is a so-called probability variation function that does not operate after the jackpot game. Usually a big hit.

  When the probability changing function is activated, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to change the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2401). In the present embodiment, specifically, the main control MPU 4100a, when the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot A, C, E, F, the game when winning the jackpot It is determined that the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode regardless of the state. When the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot D, the main control MPU 4100a operates the movable piece 2105 if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. If it is determined that the mode is not changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode and the game mode is other than the external normal game state A (external normal game state A or external advantageous game state A, B), the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is normal. It is determined that the mode is changed to the promotion mode. In other words, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, C, E, F is won among the jackpots (so-called probability-changing jackpots) in which the probability changing function is activated after the jackpot game, the external advantageous gaming state is always made after the jackpot game. Transition to B. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot D out of the so-called probability variation jackpot, the external normal gaming state B is only after the jackpot game if the gaming state at the time of winning is the external normal gaming state A. When the game state at the time of winning is other than the external normal game state A, the game shifts to the external advantageous game state B.

  When determining that the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode (YES in Step S2411), the main control MPU 4100a changes the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 from the normal mode to the promotion mode (Step S2412). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 is not changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode, the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2412 and updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2415). End the big hit control process.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S2409 that the probability variation function should not be activated (big hit B) (NO in step S2409), the main control MPU 4100a moves the movable piece 2105. The operation mode is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2413). After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the number of operations (for example, 100 times) of the movable piece 2105 in the promotion mode (step S2414), updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2415), and hits the special electric accessory big hit The control process ends. That is, the gaming machine of the present embodiment always shifts to the external advantageous gaming state A when a so-called normal jackpot (bonus B) is won. Then, when the symbol variation (lottery) is performed the above number of times without winning the next jackpot, the main control MPU 4100a changes the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 from the promotion mode to the normal mode (peripheral control). The MPU 4140a changes the operation mode of the movable piece 2105 from the promotion mode to the normal mode in accordance with an instruction from the main control MPU 4100a).

[5-15. Special electric accessory small hit control process]
Next, the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process, first, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is being opened (step S2501). When determining that the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is being opened (step S2501: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201 has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed (step S2502) (step S2502: YES), the main control MPU 4100a closes the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 (step S2504), and the special electric accessory small The hit control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the release time has not elapsed in step S2502 (step S2502: NO), whether the game ball with the maximum number of winnings set in step S2201 has won the second big prize opening 2404 of the second attacker unit 2500? It is determined whether or not (step S2503). If the maximum number of winning game balls has won the second big prize opening 2404 of the second attacker unit 2500 (step S2503: YES), the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 is closed (step S2504). ), The special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball with the maximum number of winnings has not won the second big prize opening 2404 of the second attacker unit 2500 (step S2503: NO), the special electric accessory small hit control process is finished as it is.

  In step 2501, if the second opening / closing member 2502 is not open (step S2501: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of rounds set in advance in step S2201 has been reached (step S2505). ). If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (step S2505: YES), the main control MPU 4100a turns the small hit flag OFF (step S2508), and updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2508). S2509), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of rounds set in advance is not reached in step S2505 (step S2505: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a predetermined time between rounds (interval between rounds) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S2506). If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S2506: NO), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S2506: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs the opening process of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 (step S2507), and the special electric accessory small hit control process Exit.

[5-16. About latent suggestion processing]
(1) Basic latent suggestion process (1-1) Configuration of basic process Next, the latent suggestion process will be described based on FIGS. 258 to 267. FIG. 258 additionally shows a means (latent probability suggesting means 4300) for executing the latent probability suggesting process in the configuration of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 232, and among the configurations shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram showing only the means particularly related to the means 4300.

  For convenience of explanation, the name of each means is used by changing it to the name in FIG. 232. In that case, the name in FIG. 232 is shown in parentheses in the text or in the drawing. Further, in the following description, for the sake of convenience of explanation, only the start-port sensor, the random number generation means, and the special symbol variation pattern selection means are those related to “first”. Are processed in the same way in the winning of the second or third starting opening, and the following are also shown in the second and third starting opening sensors, random number generating means, and special symbol variation pattern selecting means. This processing can be realized by replacing the case in the first case.

  In the latent suggestion process of the present embodiment, first, a start port sensor (first start port sensor) 3120, a random number generation means (first special random number generation means) 4212, and a hold storage means (first special symbol hold storage means). ) 4214 and jackpot determination means (first special symbol variation pattern selection means) 4216. Although these configurations have already been described, a description will be added below for confirmation.

  The random number generation means 4212 includes a start port sensor 3120 for detecting a winning of a game ball at the start port, and special symbol lottery unit data (for example, a special random number, for example) every time a start of a game ball is detected by the start port sensor 3120 This is a means for generating a design random number, reach determination random number, variation pattern random number, variation type random number).

  The hold storage unit 4214 generates special random numbers generated by the random number generation unit 4212 and various data (for example, design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, variation type random numbers) acquired together with the generation of the predetermined conditions. It is a means to memorize | store temporarily according to.

  The big hit determination means 4216 selects a special symbol variation pattern based on one special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100, and determines whether or not it is a big hit It is a means to determine including.

  The above is the general control configuration in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 232, but the means for directly executing the latent suggestion processing in the present embodiment is the latent suggestion means 4300 in FIG. The latent probability suggesting means 4300 includes a jackpot type determining means 4311, a reserved ball number confirming means 4312, a starting port passage confirming means 4313, and a latent probability suggesting notifying means 4314.

  The jackpot type determination unit 4311 is a unit that determines whether or not the jackpot type that caused the transition to the current gaming state is a latent jackpot.

  That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type exists from jackpots A to F, and the jackpot (so-called probability variation jackpot) in which the probability variation function operates after the jackpot game is the jackpot A, C, D, This is the case where E and F are won. And if the jackpot A, C, E, or F is won among the jackpots (the so-called probability change jackpot) in which the probability changing function is activated after the jackpot game, the game always shifts to the external advantageous gaming state B after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the jackpot D is won, the game state transitions to the external normal gaming state B after the jackpot game only when the gaming state at the time of winning is the external normal gaming state A, and the gaming state at the time of winning is the external normal gaming state. If the game state is other than A, the game moves to the external advantageous game state B.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the case of “latency big hit” is a case of big hit D and the game state at the time of winning is the external normal game state A. Therefore, the jackpot type determination means 4311 determines whether or not the cause of the occurrence of the jackpot game that causes the transition to the probability changing state corresponds to this “latent probability jackpot”.

  Here, for explanation, as described above, in the small hit game, the advantageous game state generating means 4232 performs the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502 of the second attacker unit 2500 a plurality of times in a short-time opening / closing pattern. In this embodiment, the game is repeated 15 times. In this short-time opening / closing pattern, after the second opening / closing member 2502 is opened from the closed state, a predetermined short time (for example, 1.0 second) elapses, or This is a pattern in which the second opening / closing member 2502 is closed when a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls wins the second grand prize opening 2404. That is, the jackpot game played when winning the jackpot D and the jackpot game is the same in the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2502. It is in a state where it cannot be determined. For the player, since it is impossible to grasp at a glance whether the current game mode is a high probability state or a low probability state, it is very frustrating and the game is lost in the psychological state that is lost and cannot be pulled easily. Will be.

  The number-of-reserved-balls confirming unit 4312 determines the number of special symbol lottery unit data (hereinafter referred to as “reserved”) stored from the storage unit 4214 when it is determined by the jackpot type determination unit 4311 that the cause of the big hit is a latent big hit. This is a means for obtaining information indicating whether or not the number of reservations is the upper limit of four.

  The starting port passage confirmation unit 4313 is a unit that determines whether or not the passing of the game ball is detected from the starting port sensor 3120 when the number of reserves is an overflow state in the latent state.

  The latent probability suggestion means 4314 notifies the peripheral circuit board 4140 that the current gaming state is in the latent probability mode when the start-port passage confirmation means 4313 detects the passage of the game ball, and the peripheral circuit board 4140 It is means for notifying the player through the board 4140 by an effect including sound or video.

  As such an effect, a number of special sounds (sugging sounds such as pune, huh, uhyah, atsuyo, etc.) that are different from normal times are given as a suggestion of the subtlety, or a “subjective intrusion!” For example, it can be configured by outputting a voice that directly indicates the latent state. In addition, a method of displaying characters such as “Hot!” And “Latent intrusion!” Through the liquid crystal display device 1400 is also conceivable. It is a “suggestion” rather than a notification of the latency, and if you want to avoid reporting the latency directly, just like the former, you will simply hear a sound that is different from the normal performance. Is preferably output.

(1-2) Basic Process Flow The flow of the latent suggestion process having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 while referring to the block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 259, first, the jackpot type determination means 4311 determines whether or not the cause of the jackpot game occurrence that has caused the transition to the current gaming state is a latent jackpot (step S2591). In this confirmation, a special symbol variation pattern based on one special symbol lottery unit data is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. More specifically, Of the table data in FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the table number E corresponding to the distribution at the time of “big hit D” in the external normal gaming state A is selected.

  In S2591, if the big hit type determination means 4311 confirms that the current state is not caused by the latent big hit (NO in S2591), the latent big suggestion process is terminated (return), and the big hit big hit is hit. If it is confirmed (YES in S2591), the number of reserved balls 4312 determines whether or not the number of held balls is in an overflow state, that is, the upper limit of four (S2592).

  If the number of retained first special symbols is not in the overflow state (NO in S2592), the latent suggestion process is terminated (return), and if it is in the overflow state (YES in S2592), the starting port passage confirmation means 4313 is In this overflow state, it is further determined whether or not the passing of the game ball is detected from the start port sensor 3120 (S2593).

  Then, if the passage of the game ball is not detected by the start port passage confirmation means 4313 (NO in S2593), the latent suggestion process is terminated, and if the passage of the game ball is detected (YES in S2593), The latent suggestion means 4300 notifies the peripheral circuit board 4140 that the current gaming state is in the latent probability mode, and notifies the player through the peripheral circuit board 4140 with an effect including audio or video (S2594). ), The latent suggestion process is terminated (return).

(1-3) Effects of Basic Processing According to the latent suggestion processing of the present embodiment as described above, the start condition of the latent suggestion is that the winning at the start of the game ball is in an overflow state. It was. Specifically, when the reserved ball number confirmation means 4312 and the start opening passage confirmation means 4313 confirm the winning of the ball game ball at the start opening exceeding the number of reservations (for example, 4), a voice or By notifying the player through the effect including the video, the player is informed that the game is in a latent game state.

  Normally, when the upper limit of the number of holds is exceeded, even if a game ball enters the winning opening, it is not considered as a winning target. For this reason, there is no merit for the player to continue hitting beyond the number of holds, and when the player exceeds the number of holds, the player stops hitting. When a player sits in front of a gaming machine, there is a time when he / she does not strike, which is negative in terms of profit of the store (hall).

  In this regard, according to the latent probability suggesting means 4300 of the present embodiment, since the game suggestion means 4300 is made to work by further winning the game ball at the starting port after exceeding the upper limit of the number of holds, the player can play the game Regardless of the number of holds, the game ball will continue to be fired to know the state. Continuing to play even if the player exceeds the number of holds means that the consumption of game balls is promoted, and the store (hall) can efficiently increase profits.

(2) Configuration with other additional means In addition to the basic processing configuration described above, the latent suggestion processing in the present embodiment is as shown in the following (2-1) to (2-4). Each means. 260 to 267, the configuration other than the internal configuration of the latent probability suggesting means 4300 of the main board 4000 is the same as that shown in FIG. 258. Therefore, here, the latent means having the additional means in this section is used. Only the internal configuration of the confirmation suggesting unit 4300 will be described.

(2-1) In the case of having a latent suggestion degree varying means [configuration]
As shown in FIG. 260, the latent suggestion process in the present embodiment may be provided with a latent suggestion degree varying means 4320 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. This latent probability suggestion degree varying means 4320 includes suggestion condition satisfaction number counting means 4321 and suggestion degree setting means 4322. As for the other configurations, each of the jackpot type determination means 4311, the reserved ball number confirmation means 4312, the start port passage confirmation means 4313, and the latent probability suggestion notification means 4314 is the same as described in the above-described latent suggestion notification process. Although having means, the above description is incorporated for these configurations.

  The suggestion condition satisfaction number counting means 4321 is a means for counting the number of passages n as, for example, the satisfaction number “m = n−1” of the latent probability suggestion condition based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the start port. That is, when the process of the latent probability suggestion varying means 4320 is started and the passage of the game ball to the first starting port is detected for the first time, “m = n−1” is a means for calculating “0”. is there. Therefore, when the processing of the latent probability suggestion varying means 4320 is started and the passage of the game ball to the first start port is detected for the first time, “m = n−1” is calculated as “0”. It will be.

  The suggestion degree setting unit 4322 is a unit that sets “m + 1” as the coefficient value of the suggestion degree for the latent suggestion condition satisfaction number calculated by the suggestion condition satisfaction number counting unit 4321. For example, when the latent suggestion condition satisfaction number is “0”, “m + 1” is “1”. Therefore, in this case, the suggestion degree setting unit 4322 sets the suggestion degree as “1”.

  The degree of suggestion here refers to the volume of the sound when notifying the player by the latent suggestion notifying means 4314 through the peripheral circuit board 4140, and the size of the latent suggestion character displayed on the video. This refers to the degree of brightness and lighting. For example, if the suggestion level is “1”, the volume, character size, and illumination brightness are set to “small”. If the suggestion level is “2”, these are set to “medium”, and the suggestion level is “ If “3”, these are set in advance to be “large”.

[Processing flow and effects]
A processing flow of the latent suggestion degree varying means 4320 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the processing of the latent probability suggestion varying means 4320, the processing up to detecting whether or not a game ball has passed at the first starting port in S2614 is the same as the basic processing flow described above. The processing after the processing will be described in detail.

  In the latent suggestion degree varying means 4320, the suggestion condition satisfaction number counting means 4321 determines the number of passages n based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the first start port as the satisfaction number “m = n -1 "(S2615). Accordingly, the processing of the latent suggestion degree varying means 4320 is started, and when the passing of the game ball to the first starting port is detected for the first time in S2614, “m = n−1” is “0”. Calculated.

  Subsequently, the suggestion degree setting unit 4322 sets “m + 1” as the coefficient value of the suggestion degree for the latent probability suggestion condition satisfaction number calculated in S2615 (S2616). In this case, if the latent suggestion condition satisfaction number in S2615 is “0”, “m + 1” becomes “1”. Therefore, in this case, the suggestion degree is set to “1”, for example, the suggested sound volume is “low”.

  Based on the setting value of the degree of latent suggestion in the suggestion degree setting means 4322, the latent suggestion notifying means 4314 notifies the peripheral circuit board 4140 of the amount of latent suggestion according to the degree of latent suggestion to the peripheral circuit. Through the board 4140, the player is notified of the effect including voice or video (S2617), and the series of processes is terminated (return).

  According to the suggestion level setting unit 4322 as described above, the latent probability suggestion unit 4300 further includes an suggestion level changing unit that changes the number of times of suggestion and the ease of understanding according to the number of winning game balls to the start port. According to this suggestion degree varying means, the more the prize is placed at the start port while the number of holdings overflows, for example, gradually increase the volume of the suggestion of latent or make the production using electrical decoration flashy. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to determine the latent suggestion. For this reason, even if the number of reserves overflows, the player may be guided to a state of suspicion that he / she missed the latent suggestion in the first prize or “there may have been a latent suggestion”. A player in such a psychological state continues to hit a goal at the starting point without stopping the launch of the game ball in order to obtain a certainty of suggestion of the latent probability. By such an effect, the player's sense of expectation for suggesting the latent probability is further improved, and the game is continued. Thereby, a store (hall) can aim at expansion of profit.

  In addition, if a specific player in a store (hall) is hitting a lot of game balls for announcement of latent suggestion, the stand has a voice suggestion effect and an electronic display as compared to other stands. Since it is flashy on the decoration surface, it becomes possible for the employees in the store (hall) to determine at a glance which player is hitting more, and in some cases, it becomes easier to perform customer service in the hall.

(2-2) In the case of having suggested time control means [configuration]
In addition to the basic latent suggestion process configuration described above, the latent suggestion process in the present embodiment may further include an implied time control unit 4330. Note that the latent probability suggestion process in this section is also a configuration other than the suggestion time control means 4330, and as described in the latent probability suggestion process above, the big hit type determination means 4311, the reserved ball number confirmation means 4312, the start opening passage This is executed by each of the confirmation unit 4313 and the latent suggestion notification unit 4314, and the above description is used for these configurations.

  The suggested time control means 4330 confirms the current time after the passing of the game ball to the starting opening is confirmed by the starting opening passage checking means 4313 described above, and only when the time is within a preset time. Then, the latent notification means is requested to notify the player of the latent suggestion.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 262, the suggested time control means 4330 includes time acquisition means 4331 for acquiring current time information from a timer W having a clock function provided outside, and the acquired current The suggestion time determination unit 4332 determines whether or not the time is suitable for performing latent suggestion based on the time. In this embodiment, the timer W has a clock function. However, when the gaming machine itself does not have an existing clock function, for example, “hours after power-on” is provided. If this is the case, it is possible to perform the latent suggestion start control not by setting the time but by setting the elapsed time.

[Processing flow and effects]
A processing flow of the suggested time control unit 4330 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the processing of the suggestion time control unit 4330, the processing until the presence / absence of the passing of the game ball at the start port in S2634 is the same as the basic processing flow described above. Will be described in detail.

  In the suggestion time control unit 4330, the time acquisition unit 4331 acquires the current time from the timer W provided outside the main control board 4100 (S2635). Next, the time determination means checks whether or not the current time is within a preset time for issuing a latent suggestion (S2636).

  When the current time is not the latent suggestion possible time (NO in S2636), the process is terminated without notifying the latent suggestion (S2637). On the other hand, if the current time is a time that can suggest the latent probability (YES in 2636), the player is notified that it is in the latent probability mode (S2638), and the process ends (return).

  Here, as a general rule, the time for issuing a latent suggestion is that if the player knows that the current gaming state is not the latent mode but the small hit mode, the game is not continued. It means the time and the time zone that will be, more specifically, for example, about 2 hours from the opening of the pachinko store and about 2 hours until the closing, after the opening and before the closing Say.

  According to the suggestion time control means 4330 as described above, it is possible to capture a large number of players who come at the time of opening the store aiming for the latent probability by performing the latent probability suggestion in the overflow state only in a specific time zone. It becomes like this.

  Further, if the player cannot determine whether the game is in a small hit state with a low jackpot probability or a latent state with a high jackpot probability, the player does not know when to stop the game. The degree of the player's mental stress due to this varies depending on the time zone. For example, if it is not clear whether it is a small hit or indeterminate from about 1 hour before the hall closing time (for example, 23:00) (for example, about 22:00), whether or not to continue to hit until the closing time (23:00) It will be difficult to judge. The player's mental stress in such a time zone is much greater than that when, for example, he / she starts from the time when the hall is not open and the remaining time is sufficient.

  Therefore, the suggested time setting means of the present embodiment can change the presence / absence of latent suggestion depending on the time zone. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make a setting such as generating a latent suggestion from about 15 minutes (about 22:45) before the closing time (23:00). This makes it easier for the player to determine when to stop (draw) the game, so that mental stress is alleviated. On the hall side, the player's mental stress is alleviated, which increases the game duration per player and leads to an increase in the profit of the hall.

(2-3) When having latent suggestion limiting means [configuration]
In addition to the above configuration, the latent probability suggestion process in the present embodiment can also include a latent probability suggestion limiting unit 4340. For example, in a gaming machine tie-up with a singer, there is a model having a setting in which a hit song or the like of the singer flows as a production. In such a case, the latent suggestion limiting unit 4340 does not perform the latent suggestion until the end of the effect when another effect is being performed, such as while the song is playing. It is means to do.

  As a more specific configuration, as shown in FIG. 263, the latent probability suggestion limiting unit 4340 includes an effect execution confirmation unit 4341, a passing ball number accumulation unit 4342, and an suggestion notification control unit 4343. The effect execution confirmation unit 4341 accesses the command generation unit 4238 and confirms whether another reach effect or a jackpot effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like through the peripheral circuit board 4140.

  The passing ball number accumulating means 4342 is a means for receiving the passing of the game ball at the starting port in the starting port passing confirming means 4313, counting this passing number cumulatively, and storing it as a satisfaction number of the latent suggestion condition. is there.

  The suggestion notification control means 4343 receives the input of the accumulated number stored by the passing ball number accumulating means 4342, and uses this accumulated number as the number of times of latent suggestion, and performs the number of times of latent suggestion divided by this number of times. It is.

[Processing flow and effects]
A processing flow of the latent suggestion limiting unit 4340 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the processing of the latent suggestion limiting unit 4340, the processing (S2651 to S2653) until the presence / absence of the passing of the game ball at the start port is the same as the above-described basic processing flow, and therefore, in the following. The processing after the processing will be described in detail.

  The effect execution confirmation unit 4341 accesses the command generation unit 4238 and confirms whether another reach effect or a jackpot effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like through the peripheral circuit board 4140 (S2655). This effect execution confirmation means 4341 confirms whether or not other effects are being performed, for example, whether a hit song of a singer tied up with a gaming machine is currently playing.

  When an effect that should limit the latent suggestion is being executed (YES in S2654), the passing ball number accumulating unit 4342 cumulatively counts the passing ball number, and returns to S2652 to perform the processes of S2652 to S2654. repeat.

  On the other hand, if the performance to limit the latent suggestion is not being executed (NO in S2654), the suggestion control unit reads the accumulated number stored by the passing ball number accumulating unit 4342 (S2655), and the latent suggestion notifying unit The latent suggestion notifying means 4314 is controlled so that the latent suggestion notification performed by 4314 is performed for the cumulative number of times (S2656). Based on this, the latent suggestion notifying means 4314 uses the accumulated number as the number of latent suggestions, and performs the latent suggestion in several times for this number of times (S2657). Thereafter, the process ends (return).

  According to the latent suggestion limiting means 4340 of the present embodiment as described above, for example, in a model in which a song flows during a reach such as a song pachi, the player enjoys a song during the reach, The suggestion sound that sounds in the middle of the song is a hindrance. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the suggestion sound output process is interrupted by the latent suggestion limiting means 4340 while the song is being played. In the meantime, the number of winnings at the start port is counted, and after the song is finished (after the reach effect is finished), the output processing of the suggested sound for the count value is resumed. With such latent suggestion limiting means 4340, the player can continue the game while enjoying the song that flows during the reach.

(2-4) In the case of having the latent probability limit setting accepting means In addition to the configuration having the latent suggestion limiting means 4340 shown in FIG. Is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 256, the latent probability limit setting accepting means 4350 allows the player to turn on / off the latent probability suggestion restricting means 4340 so as not to perform the latent probability when the other effects described above are being executed. It can be set. In the block shown in FIG. 231, for example, the suggestion restriction acceptance accepts input from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 377 via the sub drawer relay board 1008, the lamp driving board 4160, and the peripheral board 4010. is there.

  The processing of the latency limit setting accepting unit 4350 as described above will be described with reference to FIG. If the result of checking the presence / absence of the suggestion restriction function and the setting of the suggestion restriction function are not set as a result of checking the presence / absence of the suggestion restriction function in S2674 of the latent probability suggestion restriction means 4300 A function of notifying the player that the player is in the latent mode in S2670 without adding the process of S2676 to 2679 (the process described in the section of the latent suggestion limiting unit 4300) is added to (NO in S2674). Is.

  That is, in S2673, when the passing of a game ball is detected at the starting port (YES in S2673), there is a suggestion restriction function setting, that is, the latent suggestion is not performed during execution of other effects. It is confirmed whether it is set (S2674), and if it is not set (NO in S2674), notification control that the current gaming state is the latent probability mode is performed via the latent probability notification means. Yes (S2670).

  According to the latency limit setting accepting unit 4350 of the present embodiment as described above, the necessity of the restriction is accepted by an input from the player. Thus, for example, a player who is not so interested in the sound that flows from the gaming machine as a production such as a song in a song-pachi model, can quickly set the release of the restriction function without waiting for the end of the production of the song etc. It will be possible to know whether there is a latent suggestion.

[6. Example of production display]
[Example of production in external normal gaming state A]
Next, an example of an effect performed on the display screen 1400X of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the external normal gaming state A will be described. In this example, when the game state is the external normal game state A, each of the plurality of decorative symbols in the stopped state starts to change and performs a roaring effect indicating whether or not a reach state is formed. The reach formation effect is executed, and after the reach effect is executed, the effect until the jackpot symbol array is finally formed (displayed) using a plurality of decorative symbols is shown. Hereinafter, this production example is also referred to as a reach jackpot production. Here, the “reach state” is a state in which some of the decorative symbols are missing (being changed) from the state in which the jackpot symbol array composed of a plurality of decorative symbols is formed, and the jackpot symbol array is formed. The state before one step. For example, when the jackpot symbol array is represented using three decorative symbols representing the number “7” (when the jackpot symbol array is “777”), the reach state is, for example, “7 ↓ 7” It is a state. Here, “↓” represents that the decorative design is changing. In addition, the jackpot symbol arrangement may be displayed when any of a plurality of types of jackpots A to F is won, or instead when a specific jackpot is won. There may be. For example, the jackpot symbol arrangement may be displayed only when the jackpots A, B, and F in which a long open jackpot game is played are won. Such distribution of effects may be determined by the distribution of the above-described variation pattern table (FIG. 244). The external normal gaming state A corresponds to an acceptance suppression low probability mode.

Reach jackpot production:
When the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a variation pattern when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot variation pattern; see FIG. 249, etc.). In some cases, one effect display pattern including a reach jackpot effect (hereinafter also referred to as a reach jackpot effect display pattern) may be determined (selected) based on a specific variation pattern.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined reach jackpot effect display pattern, and executes the reach jackpot effect on the display screen 1400X.

  FIG. 268 to FIG. 273 are diagrams for explaining the reach jackpot effect. Each of FIGS. 268 to 273 represents an image (frame image) displayed on the display screen 1400X. By viewing the frame images shown in FIGS. 268 to 273 in order, the outline of the reach jackpot effect can be grasped.

  As shown in FIG. 268, in the reach jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 269, the decorative symbols are stopped in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c on the display screen 1400X. The decorative symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are started to change at high speed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol representing the number “X” is represented as a decorative symbol FX. For example, a decorative design representing the number “1” is assumed to be a decorative design F1. In FIG. 268, a decorative symbol F6, a decorative symbol F8, and a decorative symbol F5 are shown in the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 269, in the following, in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c, when the decorative symbol is changing at high speed, it is indicated that the high-speed change is performed. This is indicated by an arrow (for example, “↓”) indicating the fluctuation direction.

  Subsequently, the turning effect is executed on the display screen 1400X. For example, as shown in FIG. 270, the decorative design of the left design row 1153a is changed in the left design sequence 1153a while the decorative design is changed in the upward direction at a low speed, while the decorative design is changed in the right design sequence 1153c at a low speed in the downward direction. And an effect such that the decorative symbols in the right symbol row 1153c pass each other are executed. In this case, in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbols are changed at high speed (not shown). In the present embodiment, the roaring effect is not limited to an effect in which symbols pass each other, and various effects that can be used to derive whether or not a reach state is to be formed can be employed. For example, a pseudo-changing effect that repeats a mode in which the decorative design is changed and stopped can be adopted as the turning effect. In FIG. 260, the main character CHA is displayed in order to excite the production during the production production.

  Next, a reach formation effect for forming a reach state is executed on the display screen 1400X. For example, as shown in FIG. 271, in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the same decorative symbol (decorative symbol F4 in the example of the figure) is stopped and the title TL1 indicating the characters “REACH” is displayed. . In this case, the reach state is formed by the decorative design F4.

  Subsequently, the post-reach effect is executed on the display screen 1400X. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262, whether or not the decorative symbol F4 that displays a plurality of decorative symbols to rotate on the display screen 1400X and forms a reach state stops in the middle symbol row 1153b. An effect that emphasizes is performed. In the present embodiment, the post-reach effect is not limited to this, and other various effects can be applied. For example, a story effect that progresses in a specific narrative style can be applied as a post-reach effect.

  Then, after the post-reach effect is executed on the display screen 1400X, as shown in FIG. 273, the jackpot symbol array is finally displayed. In the example of FIG. 273, the jackpot symbol array “444” is stopped and displayed by displaying the decorative symbol F4 in the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned reach jackpot effect is an example of the effect at the time of the jackpot, when the game state is the external normal game state A, and the special lottery result is not a jackpot, it has been described in the above reach jackpot effect There is a case where an effect of stopping and displaying the off symbol arrangement may be executed after executing the turning effect, reach formation effect, and post-reach effect.

  Thus, as an example of the effect in the external normal gaming state A, an effect that suggests whether or not the special lottery result is a big hit can be performed using a symbol. The player enjoys the performance with an interest in what kind of symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Example of production in external advantageous gaming state A]
Next, an example of effects in the external advantageous gaming state A performed on the display screen 1400X of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. In this example, when the game state is the external advantageous game state A, the effect (song) progresses (achieves) to the end, and it is a big hit, and when the effect (song) ends in the middle, the effect is lost. ing. Hereinafter, this effect example is also referred to as an achievement effect. In this achievement effect, the reach state is not formed unlike the reach jackpot effect. This external advantageous gaming state A corresponds to an acceptance promoting low probability mode. First, an effect that is a big hit (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot achievement effect) among the achievement effects will be described, and then an effect that will be out of the achievement effects (hereinafter also referred to as a loss achievement effect) will be described. . Note that the jackpot achievement effect may be realized when any of a plurality of types of jackpots A to F is won, or instead when a specific jackpot is won. There may be. For example, the jackpot achievement effect may be realized only when the jackpots A, B, and F in which a long open jackpot game is performed are won. Such distribution of effects may be determined by the distribution of the above-described variation pattern table (FIG. 244).

Achievement of jackpot:
When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern (see FIG. 249, etc.) Based on the variation pattern, one effect display pattern including a jackpot achievement effect (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot achievement effect display pattern) may be determined (selected).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined jackpot achievement effect display pattern, and executes the jackpot achievement effect on the display screen 1400X.

  274 to 284 are diagrams for explaining the jackpot achievement effect. Each of FIGS. 274 to 274 represents an image (frame image) displayed on the display screen 1400X. By looking at the frame images shown in FIGS. 274 to 284 in order, the outline of the jackpot achievement effect can be grasped.

  In the jackpot achievement effect, as in the case of the reach jackpot effect, FIG. 269 shows that the decorative symbols are stopped in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c on the display screen 1400X. As described above, the decorative symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c start to fluctuate at high speed. Thereafter, on the display screen 1400X, as shown in FIG. 274, a door image TA representing a state in which the left door image TA1 and the right door image TA2 are closed is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 275, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TA1 moves leftward, the right door image TA2 moves rightward (that is, the door image TA opens), and the title TL2 Is displayed. The title TL2 is expressed as “Sing and sing and continue to sing!”, And suggests that if this jackpot achievement production progresses to the end, there is a good thing (that is, a jackpot). Actually, in this jackpot achievement effect, if the main character CHA continues to sing a specific song (hereinafter also referred to as song MN) (if the door image closes and disappears can be repeated four times) When the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed and the main character CHA cannot continue singing (if the door image closes and disappears four times, it cannot be repeated four times and ends halfway) The array is displayed and is out of place. This will be described in detail below.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 276, the appearance of the main character CHA is displayed on the display screen 1400X, and the count CUT1 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The count CUT1 represents the remaining number of door images that are closed until the achievement effect progresses to the end, that is, until the big win. In FIG. 276, the remaining number is four. The player can know the progress degree of the achievement effect by looking at the count number. That is, since the count CUT1 has four remaining door images, the player who sees this can know the degree of progress of the effect (how much remains until the end of the achieved effect). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a plays music corresponding to the introduction part of the song MN from the speaker 121.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 277, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TA1 moves to the right and the right door image TA2 moves to the left, so that the closed door image TA is displayed. Here, in the jackpot achievement effect, the main character CHA is displayed so as to be positioned on the nearer side as viewed from the player than the door image TA. This represents that the progress of the music (production) is continued. In addition, the lyrics KAS of the song MN are displayed at the bottom of the screen. In the upper right of the screen, a count CUT2 is displayed instead of the count CUT1. This count CUT2 indicates that the remaining number of door images is three. A player who observes the count CUT2 can know that the achievement effect is in progress. At this time, music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121. Note that the contents of the lyrics KAS are sequentially updated as the music progresses (the same applies to other figures described later).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 278, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TA1 and the right door image TA2 are deleted, and new door images TB (the left door image TB1 and the right door image TB2) are displayed. In addition, the count CUT2 is displayed at the upper right of the screen and the lyrics KAS are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 279, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TB1 moves to the right and the right door image TB2 moves to the left, so that the closed door image TB is displayed. The main character CHA is displayed so as to be positioned on the nearer side as viewed from the player than the door image TB. This represents that the progress of the music (production) is continued. In the upper right of the screen, a count CUT3 is displayed instead of the count CUT2. This count CUT3 indicates that the remaining number of door images is two. The player who has observed the count CUT 3 can know that the achievement effect has been finished and one step has come. In addition, the lyrics KAS is continuously displayed at the bottom of the screen, and music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 280, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TB1 and the right door image TB2 are deleted, and new door images TC (the left door image TC1 and the right door image TC2) are displayed. Continuing, the count CUT3 is displayed at the upper right of the screen and the lyrics KAS are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 281, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TC1 and the right door image TC2 are closed to form a closed door image TC, and the main character CHA is a player than the door image TC. The count CUT 4 is displayed instead of the count CUT 3 in the upper right of the screen. This count CUT4 represents that the remaining number of door images is one. Therefore, the player can know that this achievement effect is approaching the climax. In addition, the lyrics KAS is continuously displayed at the bottom of the screen, and music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 282, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TC1 and the right door image TC2 are deleted, and new left door image TD1 and right door image TD2 are displayed. Continuously, CUT 4 is displayed at the upper right of the screen and lyrics KAS are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and music corresponding to the lyrics KAS in the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 283, on the display screen 1400X, the left door image TD1 moves to the right and the right door image TD2 moves to the left to display the closed door image TD, and the main character CHA is the door image. The title TL3 is displayed in place of the count CUT4 on the upper right side of the screen. This title TL3 is indicated as “complete run”, indicating that the remaining number of door images has disappeared and this achievement effect has progressed to the end. Therefore, the player can know that the achievement effect has progressed to the end. Also, music corresponding to the final part of the song MN is played from the speaker 121.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 284, the jackpot symbol arrangement is finally displayed on the display screen 1400X. In the example of FIG. 284, the jackpot symbol array “444” is displayed by displaying the decorative symbol F4 in the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c, respectively.

Out of director achievement:
Next, out of the achievement effects, the achievement achievement effect will be described. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific variation pattern out of the variation variation pattern (see FIG. 251, etc.) Based on the variation pattern, it is possible to determine (select) one effect display pattern including a loss achievement effect (hereinafter also referred to as a loss achievement effect display pattern).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined miss achievement achievement display pattern, and executes this miss achievement achievement on the display screen 1400X.

  In this loss achievement effect, the display screen is different from the jackpot achievement effect in the scene of FIG. 277, the scene of FIG. 269, the scene of FIG. 281 or the scene of FIG. 283 in the jackpot achievement effect. In 1400X, after the door image is closed by moving the left door image to the right and the right door image to the left, the state that the main character CHA is concealed by the door image is displayed. CHA is displayed as if hidden behind the door image), and then the off symbol arrangement is displayed. In this way, in the achievement achievement effect, the main character CHA does not finish singing the song MN like the jackpot achievement effect, and the effect is finished before the main character CHA finishes singing the song MN. It should be noted that, in the loss achievement effect, an effect having the same content as the jackpot achievement effect is performed until an effect different from the jackpot achievement effect is performed as described above.

  Thus, in the achievement effect, it is suggested whether or not the jackpot is based on whether or not the music progresses to the end. The player can enjoy the production by listening carefully to whether the music ends in the middle or to the end in order to grasp whether or not the special lottery result is a big hit.

[Example of production in external advantageous game state B]
Next, an example of effects in the external advantageous gaming state B performed on the display screen 1400X of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. In this example, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, either the external advantageous gaming state B is changed to the external advantageous gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state B is continued. Is it an effect that represents the state of trying to derive, in other words, after executing the mode derivation effect that is an effect that suggests the type of jackpot in the case of a big win, is it changed from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, Or, it represents the effect of notifying whether or not the external advantageous gaming state B is continued. Hereinafter, this effect example is also referred to as a probability variation continuation determination effect. In this probability variation continuation determination effect, the reach state is not formed unlike the reach jackpot effect. The external advantageous game state B corresponds to “high probability mode” or “acceptance promotion high probability mode”. First, of the probability variation continuation determination effects, an effect that informs that the external advantageous gaming state B is changed to the external advantageous gaming state A (hereinafter also referred to as probability variation continuation determination effect A) will be described. Of the determination effects, an effect that informs that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued (hereinafter also referred to as probability variation continuation determination effect B) will be described. Note that the probability variation continuation determination effect B (the probability variation function is continued) is realized in the case where an arbitrary jackpot is selected from among a plurality of types of jackpots A, C, D, E, and F in which the probability variation function continues. Alternatively, it may be a case where a specific part of the jackpot is won. For example, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the probability variation continuation determination effect B (the probability variation function is continued) can be realized. When the jackpot B is won, the probability variation continuation determination effect A (the probability variation function is stopped) can be realized. If the jackpot F is won, the probability variation function continues, but the probability variation continuation determination effect A can be realized in order to make the appearance effect the same as the jackpot B. When one of the jackpots C, D, E is won, an effect different from the probability variation continuation determination effect is realized (not shown). Such distribution of effects may be determined by the distribution of the above-described variation pattern table (FIG. 244).

Probability change determination effect A:
The peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern (transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a) When the jackpot type information is jackpot B or jackpot F), based on these information, one effect display pattern including the probability variation continuation determination effect A (hereinafter also referred to as probability variation continuation determination effect A display pattern). It can be determined (selected).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined probability variation continuation determination effect A display pattern, and executes this probability variation continuation determination effect A on the display screen 1400X.

  285 to 289 are diagrams for explaining the probability variation continuation determination effect A. Each of FIGS. 285 to 289 represents an image (frame image) displayed on the display screen 1400X. By looking at the frame images shown in FIGS. 285 to 289 in order, the outline of the probability variation continuation determination effect A can be grasped.

  In the probability variation continuation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 285, on the display screen 1400X, the decorative symbols are stopped at the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c located at the bottom of the screen. From the state, the decorative symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are started to change at high speed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 285, a panel image group PNLG composed of a plurality of panel images PNL is displayed on the display screen 1400X.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 286, on the display screen 1400X, a red image based on red or a blue image based on blue is displayed on the four panel images PNL located in the corners of the panel image group PNLG. Let In the display example of FIG. 286, the two panel images PNL of the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the panel image group PNLG represent a blue image, and the two panel images PNL of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the panel image group PNLG are A red image is represented. The red image shows a number that suggests the continuation of the external advantageous gaming state B, and the blue image shows a number that suggests the change from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A. . For example, in the example of FIG. 276, the red image shows the number “5” indicating the continuation of the external advantageous gaming state B, and the blue image changes from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A. The number “4” suggesting that it will be changed is shown. At this time, as shown in FIG. 286, the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c fluctuate at high speed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 287, on the display screen 1400X, at least one of the total number of panel images PNL representing a red image and the total number of panel images PNL representing a blue image changes (in this case, increases). In the display example of FIG. 287, six panel images PNL of the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the panel image group PNLG represent blue images, and the three lower right corner panel images PNL represent red images. Represents. Thus, by making the total number of the panel images PNL representing the blue images larger than the total number of the panel images PNL representing the red images (making the area representing the blue images wider than the area representing the red images), the external advantageous game It can be suggested that there is a high possibility of changing from the state B to the external advantageous gaming state A. Note that in the panel image PNL in the upper left corner that represents the red image in the scene of FIG. 286, the red image is deleted. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 277, the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c continuously change at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 288, a red image or a blue image is displayed on all the panel images PNL in the panel image group PNLG on the display screen 1400X. In the display example of FIG. 278, in the panel image group PNLG, a red image is displayed on each lower panel image PNL, and a blue image is displayed on each upper panel image PNL. Further, the total number of panel images PNL representing a blue image is larger than the total number of panel images PNL representing a red image. As described above, in the panel image group PNLG, the blue image and the red image are distributed to one side and the other side (in this case, the upper side and the lower side) of the display screen 1400X. It makes it easier to understand which number is more. Further, as shown in FIG. 288, the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c continuously change at high speed.

  The above-described effects from the scene in FIG. 285 to the scene in FIG. 288 correspond to the above-described mode derivation effects. Following the mode derivation effect, as shown in FIG. 289, finally, a jackpot symbol arrangement using a symbol (also called a normal symbol) different from the symbol representing the probability change is displayed on the display screen 1400X. In the example of FIG. 289, a jackpot symbol array “444” representing a jackpot that is not probable is displayed by displaying the decorative symbol F4 in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c, respectively. ing. As described above, when the jackpot F is won, the performance is the same as when the jackpot B is won even though the probability change function is activated after the jackpot game ends. Proceed to.

Probability change determination effect B:
Subsequently, the probability variation continuation determination effect B among the probability variation continuation determination effects will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern (transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a) When the jackpot type information is jackpot A), based on the information, one effect display pattern including the probability variation continuation determination effect B (hereinafter also referred to as probability variation continuation determination effect B display pattern) is determined (selected) )

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined probability variation continuation determination effect B display pattern, and executes this probability variation continuation determination effect B on the display screen 1400X.

  In the probability variation continuation determination effect B, in the scene of FIG. 288 in the probability variation continuation determination effect A, unlike the probability variation continuation determination effect A, the total number of panel images PNL representing a red image is the panel image PNL representing a blue image. More than the total number (not shown). The effect from the scene of FIG. 285 to the scene corresponding to FIG. 288 corresponds to a mode derivation effect. Subsequent to the mode derivation effect, a jackpot symbol array (for example, “555”) using a symbol representing a probability change is displayed.

  Thus, the probability variation continuation determination effect (mode derivation effect) suggests whether or not the external advantageous game state B is continued by using the color. Specifically, the first color (here, red) represents continuation of the external advantageous gaming state B, and the second color (here, blue) represents that the external advantageous gaming state B does not continue. ing. Then, by displaying which of the first color and the second color is dominant, it is suggested whether or not the external advantageous gaming state B continues. In order to grasp whether or not the external advantageous gaming state B continues, the player can enjoy the effect by carefully observing how many dominant colors are. Various methods can be adopted as a method of expressing which of the first color and the second color is dominant. For example, the total number of regions representing each color (for example, the panel image PNL) may be used, or the area of each region representing each color may be used.

  Note that, in the case where the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the jackpot type information is jackpot A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has the total number of panel images PNL representing a blue image as a red image as shown in FIG. The display (production) larger than the total number of panel images PNL representing can be realized. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the jackpot type information is jackpot B or jackpot F, the total number of panel images PNL representing red images is larger than the total number of panel images PNL representing blue images. Many displays (production) can be realized. However, if the display (effect) in which the total number of panel images PNL representing red images is larger than the total number of panel images PNL representing blue images is realized, the peripheral control MPU 4140a realizes the total number of panel images PNL representing red images. The effect display pattern is determined (selected) so that the probability that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued is higher than when display (effect) less than the total number of panel images PNL representing the blue image is realized. To do. As a result, in this mode derivation effect, it is possible to suggest a high possibility (expected degree) that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued by the ratio (total number) of panel images PNL representing red images. For example, when the number of panel images PNL representing a red image is larger than the number of panel images PNL representing a blue image, the number of panel images PNL representing a red image is smaller than the number of panel images PNL representing a blue image. It can be suggested that the probability that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued is higher than the case.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a is not limited to the stage shown in FIG. 288, and changes the ratio (total number) of the panel images PNL representing the red image in the course of the mode derivation effect as shown in FIGS. 285 to 278. Yes. Thereby, since the probability (proposed probability) that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued is changed a plurality of times, the player's interest in the performance can be maintained. Here, the probability (suggested probability) that the external advantageous gaming state B is continued may be increased again after once decreasing.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, the probability variation continuation determination effect described above when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific variation pattern out of the variation variation pattern. After performing an effect similar to that in the middle of the above, there is a case where an effect display pattern for displaying the off symbol arrangement is determined and executed. In this way, even if there are many panel images PNL representing blue images in which the continuation of the external advantageous gaming state B is jeopardized in the panel image group PNLG in the mode derivation effect, if the deviation is reported in the subsequent effect. Thus, it is possible to leave a possibility of winning a jackpot that can continue the external advantageous gaming state B. As a result, even if there are many panel images PNL representing a blue image in the panel image group PNLG, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is excessively discouraged.

  By the way, in the case where the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than the external normal gaming state A, the external advantageous gaming state A, etc., so the player will be a big hit in the near future. You can expect that and you won't have to worry too much about whether or not you will win. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, it is not easy to predict what the external advantageous gaming state B will continue. Therefore, the player is highly interested in whether or not the external advantageous gaming state B continues, that is, the jackpot type information. Thus, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, the player is more interested in the jackpot type information than whether or not the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the probability variation continuation determination effect of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, when the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific jackpot variation pattern. A mode derivation effect representing a state in which the gaming state is to be changed from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state B is continued. This is achieved without using a symbol to form a reach state. In this way, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, a mode derivation effect that is an effect representing the derivation of jackpot type information of high interest of the player is realized. Can attract a lot of interest. Furthermore, since this mode derivation effect is executed without forming a reach state, the player can be prevented from feeling that the effect in the high probability mode is extended, and the external advantageous game state B The player's interest in can be sustained. As described above, it is possible to realize an effect that suppresses a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Further, as described above, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, the player is more interested in the jackpot type information than whether or not the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a provides a mode derivation effect when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the variation pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is a specific jackpot variation pattern. Whether the game state is changed from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A or whether the external advantageous gaming state B is continued. The notification is made without forming the reach state. For players who are more interested in jackpot type information than whether or not it is a big win, it is not so important to form a reach state, so in a state where the game state is set to the external advantageous game state B The player is less interested in forming a reach state. Therefore, in the probability variation continuation determination effect of the present embodiment, as described above, an effect that is difficult to be interested (formation of reach state) is omitted, and the external advantageous game state B is continued without forming the reach state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect focused on the part that the player is interested in, and to maintain the player's interest in the effect in the external advantageous game state B.

  In the probability variation continuation determination effect, the mode derivation effect indicates a high possibility that the gaming state is maintained in the external advantageous gaming state B without displaying whether or not it is a big hit. In this way, as a mode derivation effect that can be realized in a state in which the gaming state is set to the external advantageous gaming state B, a desirable result of jackpot type determination with high player interest (maintenance of the external advantageous gaming state B) Since the display suggesting the high possibility of this is realized, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the production in the external advantageous gaming state B.

In the probability variation continuation effect, in the mode derivation effect, as shown in FIGS. 285 to 288, a display suggesting a high possibility that the gaming state is maintained in the external advantageous gaming state B is displayed as time passes. The height of the possibility of suggestion is changed a plurality of times. In this way, in the mode derivation effect that can be realized in a state where the gaming state is set to the external advantageous gaming state B, it is suggested that the gaming state is once likely to be maintained in the external advantageous gaming state B. Even if the display to be performed is performed, since the possibility of suggestion changes after that, the player can perform the production without losing interest in the production while the mode derivation production is realized. I can enjoy it. In addition, even if a display suggesting that the gaming state is unlikely to be maintained in the external advantageous gaming state B is once performed, since the possibility of the suggestion changes thereafter, the mode is derived. While the performance is realized, there is a possibility that the display is changed to suggest that the possibility of being maintained in the external advantageous gaming state B is high. As a result, the player can enjoy the production without losing interest in the production. Thus, the player's interest in the production in the external advantageous gaming state B can be maintained.

  As an effect that suggests the degree of expectation (possibility) that the external advantageous gaming state B is maintained, the total number or ratio of the panel images PNL representing an image showing a specific color (here, a red image) is defined as the expectation degree. Various effects can be adopted in addition to the effects to be associated. For example, an effect of associating the area of a region showing a specific color with the expected degree may be employed.

  Further, in the state where the game state is set to the external advantageous game state A, since the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is promoted by the movable piece 2105, the winning probability of jackpot is the external advantageous game state Although it is lower than B, there are more opportunities for lottery as compared to the external normal gaming state. As a result, the player wants to know whether or not each jackpot will be a big hit quickly. In this way, in the state where the gaming state is set to the external advantageous gaming state A, the player's interest in whether or not the reach state is formed is low, and whether or not the player is a big hit Give great interest. Therefore, in the achievement effect of the present embodiment, when a lottery is newly performed whether or not the game state is set to the external advantageous gaming state A, whether or not the lottery result is a win, Whether or not it is lost is notified without forming a reach state. In the state where the movable piece 2105 promotes the reception of the game ball to the movable piece 2105, the formation of the reach state is not so important for the player, so the player is interested in the formation of the reach state. Hateful. Therefore, as described above, the production (reach state formation) that is not so interesting is omitted, and the lottery result (winning or defeating) of whether or not the big win is achieved without forming the reach state. ) Is notified, the player's interest in the production can be maintained in the external advantageous gaming state A. Further, the player can be prevented from feeling that the effects in the external advantageous game state A are extended, and the player's interest in the external advantageous game state A can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to achieve an effect that suppresses a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A and the lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot is a big win, it is a big hit depending on whether or not the achievement effect has progressed to the end. Whether the lottery result of whether or not is a win or a loss is notified. In this way, the player who has experienced the achievement effect recognizes that if the achievement effect appears in the case where the game state is set to the external advantageous game state A, it may be a big hit. Can do. Therefore, when the game state is set to the external advantageous game state A, the player can look forward to the achievement effect appearing and can maintain the player's interest in the external advantageous game state A. In addition, when the achievement effect is advanced to the end, the fact that the lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot is a win is notified. In this way, the player who has experienced the achievement effect will be greatly interested in whether or not the achievement effect will progress to the end when the achievement effect appears. Can keep interest. As described above, when the gaming state is set to the external advantageous gaming state A, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  Further, in the state where the game state is set to the external normal game state A, the winning probability of the lottery whether or not the big hit is low is low, and further, the game piece is accepted into the second start port 2102 by the movable piece 2105. Because there is no promotion, there are not many opportunities for lottery whether or not it is a big hit. As a result, with respect to each lottery, the player is greatly interested in the formation of a reach state that is one step ahead of the symbol aspect indicating that the lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot is a win. . Therefore, in the above reach jackpot effect, in the state where the game state is set to the external normal game state A, a roaring effect representing a state of trying to derive whether or not to form a reach state using a symbol, Thereafter, a reach state is formed. In this way, in the state where the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A, whether or not the reach state is formed using the symbols before the reach state is formed, which is a matter that the player is greatly interested in. The player can look forward to the appearance of such an effect in the external normal gaming state A, and as a result, the external normal gaming state. The player's interest in A can be maintained. Therefore, when the gaming state is set to the external normal gaming state A, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the items (modes) in which the player is highly interested in each of the completely different game states of the external advantageous game state B, the external advantageous game state A, and the external normal game state A Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the player's interest in the production in each of the gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, as an effect example of the external advantageous gaming state B, in the panel image group PNLG, a red image or a blue image is displayed on each panel image PNL, and an external color is expressed by expressing which color is dominant. Although the probability variation continuation determination effect suggesting the high possibility that the advantageous game state B will continue is performed, such an effect is not limited to the external advantageous game state B. Such an effect can be used as an example of the effect of the external advantageous game state A, the external normal game state A, or the external normal game state B. For example, in the case where the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, a red or blue image may be displayed on each panel image PNL in the panel image group PNLG, and the degree of dominance of red may be expressed to represent a big hit You may make it suggest height. Note that the colors used for the production are not limited to red and blue, and any color can be adopted.

  Also, as an example of the production of the external advantageous gaming state A, if the production progresses (achieves) to the end, it is a big hit, and if the production ends in the middle, that is, if the main character CHA continues to sing the song MN. (If the door image closes and disappears 4 times) If the main character CHA cannot continue singing (if the door image closes, the motion that disappears can be repeated 4 times) However, such an effect is not limited to the external advantageous gaming state A. However, such an effect is not limited to the external advantageous gaming state A. Such an effect can be used as an example of the effect of the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state B. For example, in the case where the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, when the production (music) progresses (achieves) to the end, the continuation of the external advantageous gaming state B is confirmed, and the production (music) ends in the middle. If the gaming state is transitioned from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, that is, if the main character CHA continues to sing the song MN (if the operation that disappears when the door image closes can be repeated four times) If the continuation of the external advantageous game state B is confirmed and the main character CHA cannot continue singing (the operation that disappears when the door image closes cannot be repeated four times, and ends in the middle), the game state May be changed from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, only the probability variation continuation effect may be realized without forming a reach state. By doing this, it is informed whether or not the external advantageous gaming state B is continued without forming the reach state at all times because the performance (reach state formation) that is not easily interested is omitted. Therefore, it is possible to always achieve an effect focused on the part that the player is interested in, and to further maintain the player's interest in the effect in the external advantageous game state B. However, after the reach state is formed, the above-described probability variation continuation determination effect may be realized. Also in this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the probability variation continuation determination effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, only the achievement effect may be realized without forming the reach state. In this way, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, the production (reach state formation) that is not likely to be interesting is omitted, and it is always a big hit without forming the reach state. Since the lottery result (winning or unsuccessful) is notified, whether or not the player is more interested in the performance in the external advantageous gaming state A can be maintained. However, after the reach state is formed, the achievement effect may be realized. Also in this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the achievement effect.

[Prefetching meter]
[About meter production]
Next, an example of an effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 (FIG. 148) and the plurality of lens units 2684 (hereinafter also referred to as “meter prefetch effect”) will be described. In this effect example, the number of game balls that have entered the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 is counted, and when the counted number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a prefetch effect is performed with a predetermined probability. . First, the display of the count using the plurality of lens units 2684 (hereinafter also referred to as “meter effect”) will be described.

  FIG. 290 and FIG. 291 are explanatory diagrams showing the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of lens units 2684. Hereinafter, when the lens unit 2684 emits light toward the front (player) is referred to as “lighting”, and when the lens unit 2684 does not emit light is referred to as “light-off”. 290 and 291, a lower right effect display portion 2681, a plurality of lens portions 2684, a part of the stage 2410 (first stage 2411, movable stage piece 2418, second stage 2412, third stage 2413) and It is shown. As described above, the plurality of lens parts 2684 are arranged from the lower part to the upper part along the outer periphery on the left side of the lower right effect display part 2681 to form an arc-shaped line. In the present embodiment, ten lens portions 2684 are provided.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the plurality of lens units 2684 to function as a meter representing the cumulative number of game balls won in the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. Each time a game ball enters the start ports 2102 and 2415, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a increases the number of lens units 2684 that are lit among the plurality of lens units 2684. The lens portion 2684 that is turned on is the lens portion 2684 that is positioned at the lowest position among the lens portions 2684 that are turned off.

  For example, in FIG. 290, only one lens portion 2684 (the lowermost lens portion 2684) is lit. This indicates that one game ball TM has entered the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. In FIG. 291, among the plurality of lens portions 2684, the first to fifth fifth lens portions 2684 counted from the bottom are lit. This indicates that the cumulative number of game balls TM that have entered the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 is five. Each of FIG. 290 and FIG. 291 shows a state where one game ball TM wins a prize at the third start port 2415. Thus, the cumulative number of game balls that have entered the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 increases as the position (that is, the height) of the highest lens unit 2684 among the lens units 2684 in the lit state increases. Many. By observing such height, the player can easily grasp the cumulative number.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the lighting state of the plurality of lens units 2684 using a winning notification command. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the winning notification command (first type or second type winning notification command) from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes the received winning notification command, and the winning notification command is sent to which starting port. Identify whether it is due to winning.

  If the winning notification command is for winning a game ball to the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415, the peripheral control MPU 4140a increases the number of the lens units 2684 that are lit. When all the lens units 2684 are turned on by winning the game ball, the peripheral control MPU 4140a counts the cumulative number from zero again by turning off all the lens units 2684 after that. Thereby, even when the gaming machine continues to operate for a long period of time, the display of the number of game balls received by the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 can be appropriately continued. it can. Note that the number represented by the lit lens portion 2684 is irrelevant to the above-described number of reservations. For example, the number represented by the lens portion 2684 in the lit state does not decrease just because the number of reservations decreases as the lottery progresses.

  As described above, the first stage 2411 is supplied with the game ball that has entered from the upper warp inlet 2405 (FIG. 150). Then, the game ball supplied to the first stage 2411 is released forward from the first stage 2411. For example, the game ball released from the left first guide portion 2602 b can reach the movable stage piece 2418. The movable stage piece 2418 that moves forward and backward periodically distributes the destination of the game ball to either the second stage 2412 or the third stage 2413. Here, the game balls distributed to the second stage 2412 can enter the third start port 2415. On the other hand, game balls released from other parts of the first stage 2411 can be supplied to the third stage 2413 or the game area 605 without reaching the second stage 2412. For example, a game ball released from the first guide portion 2602b on the right side of the first stage 2411 cannot reach the third start port 2415 but can reach the third stage 2413. Then, the game ball supplied to the third stage 2413 is released into the game area 605.

  Thus, it is not easy for a game ball to enter the third start port 2415. Further, in an external normal game state (a game state in which the pair of movable pieces 2105 are not controlled in the above-described promotion mode), it is not easy for a game ball to enter the second start port 2102. Therefore, a player who can observe a state in which the number of lens units 2684 that are lit is large (for example, 7 or more) often continues to play a game for a long time. For a player who has continued to play for such a long time, observing the display of the cumulative number by the plurality of lens portions 2684 is difficult to obtain until then (entrance to the third start port 2415). It is one of the pleasures that can confirm the history (cumulative value) of the sphere.

  In addition, if the game ball is removed from the stage 2410 (the first stage 2411, the second stage 2412, and the third stage 2413) before reaching the third starting port 2415 though passing through the upper warp inlet 2405, The three start ports 2415 do not accept game balls. When the game ball that has passed through the upper warp inlet 2405 is led to the third start port 2415 by the stage 2410 (first stage 2411, movable stage piece 2418, second stage 2412), Accepted. Whether or not a game ball is received by the third start port 2415 can vary greatly depending on the movement of the game ball on the stage 2410. As a result, when the game ball passes the upper warp entrance 2405, the player observes the movement of the game ball on the stage 2410 while expecting the game ball to reach the third start port 2415. I can enjoy it. If the game ball is successfully guided to the third start port 2415, the game ball has been accepted into the third start port 2415 overcoming the difficulty that the game ball may be removed from the stage 2410. Joy is enhanced by an effect (an effect in which the display changes) by the plurality of lens units 2684. As a result, even when an undesired gaming state continues for a long time (for example, when the game continues without being blessed with a big hit), the player can enjoy the game.

  Furthermore, a movable stage piece 2418 is provided between the first stage 2411 and the second stage 2412, and the direction toward the second receiving port (to the right of the second stage 2412 depending on the operation state of the movable stage piece 2418). The game balls are distributed between a direction toward the second stage 2412 and a direction away from the second stage 2412 (a direction toward the third stage 2413). Thereby, the process leading to the reception of the game ball by the third start port 2415 can be made more dynamic. Thereby, the pleasure of observing the movement of the game ball on the stage 2410 can be improved.

[About prefetching]
Next, the prefetching effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 will be described. As described above, the winning notification commands supplied from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 include the first type winning notification command and the second type winning notification command. The first type winning notification command does not indicate the determination result in the preceding determination process (hereinafter also referred to as “preceding determination result”), and the second type winning notification command indicates the preceding determination result (see FIG. 239). . When the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the second type winning notification command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a preliminarily displays the special lottery result in the variation corresponding to the winning of the game ball corresponding to the second type winning notification command to some extent. Can be specified. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests a preceding determination result represented by the second type winning notification command.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the second type winning notification command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (also referred to as “preceding effect”). As the pre-reading effect, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a specific hit in the variation corresponding to the winning of the game ball corresponding to the second type winning notification command ("future expectation suggesting effect" Is also called “expectation direction”. For example, as the pre-reading effect, a high expectation effect that is an effect suggesting that the probability that the special lottery result is a specific hit is higher (looks higher) than the original probability may be performed. The high expectation effect is the probability that the high expectation effect will be performed when the preceding determination result indicates a specific hit, and the probability that the high expectation effect will be performed when the preceding determination result does not indicate a specific hit It can be realized by making it higher. As a result, although the actual probability that the special lottery result will be a specific hit is not different from the original probability, the probability that the special lottery result will be a specific hit is high only when the high expectation effect is realized. Looks like a player. Note that, as the pre-reading effects, a plurality of types of expectation effects with different suggested degrees can be realized. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is expected to be suggested as a pre-reading effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 compared to the high expectation effect and the high expectation effect. It is possible to achieve a low expectation degree production with a low degree.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a also determines the content (type) of the prefetch effect when executing the prefetch effect. In the present embodiment, there is an effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 as one type of prefetch effect. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the second-type winning notification command when the seven or more lens units 2684 of the plurality of lens units 2684 are lit, and the lower right effect display unit 2681 is displayed. It is supposed to be able to execute a pre-reading effect using. Further, as will be described later, the prefetch effects using the lower right effect display unit 2681 include a high expectation effect and a low expectation effect with a lower expectation level than the high expectation effect. The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether to execute a prefetch effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681, and executes either the high expectation effect or the low expectation effect when executing the prefetch effect. Whether to do so is determined by a prior determination result and a lottery using a random number. Note that as a prefetching effect, a prefetching effect that does not use the lower right effect display unit 2681 can also be realized. The peripheral control MPU 4140a separately determines whether or not to perform such prefetching effects (detailed description is omitted).

  In the present embodiment, in the external normal game state, the main control board 4100 receives a game ball in the first start port 2101 and a game ball in the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. In both cases, the second type winning notification command is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140. In the external advantageous gaming state, the main control board 4100 supplies the first type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game ball wins the first starting port 2101, and the second starting port 2102 or the second starting port 2101. When a game ball wins at the three start ports 2415, a second type winning notification command is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the second type winning notification command of the first starting port 2101 and the second type winning notification command of the second starting port 2102 or the third starting port 2415 in the external normal gaming state. Thus, a pre-reading effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 can be executed. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a prefetch effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 using the second type winning notification command of the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 in the external advantageous game state. It is possible (in the external advantageous gaming state, the pre-reading effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 triggered by the winning notification command of the first start port 2101 is not executed).

  FIG. 292 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the plurality of lens units 2684 are turned on / off. In the state example of FIG. 282, the seven lens portions 2684 are lit. In this state, when the game ball enters the third start port 2415, the main control board 4100 supplies the second type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether to perform the pre-reading effect using the received second type winning notification command. Here, the description will be made assuming that the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines to perform a prefetching effect (either a high expectation effect or a low expectation effect) using the lower right effect display unit 2681. When it is determined that the pre-reading effect using the lower right effect display unit 2681 is not performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a increases the number of the lens units 2684 in the lighting state among the plurality of lens units 2684 to increase the lens. The processing related to the unit 2684 and the lower right effect display unit 2681 ends.

  FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the state of the lower right effect display portion 2681 and the plurality of lens portions 2684 following the state of FIG. 292. First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a temporarily turns on all of the plurality of lens units 2684 (FIG. 293 (A)), and transmits a specific sound (eg, siren sound) indicating lighting of all the lens units 2684 to a speaker (for example, , The speakers 121 and 391). Thereby, the player notices that the meter is full at once (all the plurality of lens parts 2684 in the off state are in the on state at one time), and that something special can happen. Expect and enjoy the production. In particular, since a plurality of meters (lighted lens portions 2684) that do not increase easily increase at a time, the joy of the player is exceptional. As a result, even if an undesired gaming state has continued for a long time (for example, when a game has continued without being blessed with a jackpot), the stress that the player can feel can be alleviated. .

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a continues to realize one selected from the high expectation degree effect and the low expectation degree effect. FIG. 293 (B) shows a high expectation degree effect. In the high expectation degree effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes each of the plurality of lens units 2684 to blink a plurality of times, and causes the lower right effect display unit 2681 to emit red light, thereby causing a specific expectation degree per hit. Is displayed on the lower right effect display portion 2681 (in the display example of FIG. 283 (B), characters “chance !?” are displayed). Thus, the player who has observed the red image displayed on the lower right effect display unit 2681 reads that the degree of expectation is high, and may have a sense of expectation that he may win a specific hit in the near future.

  FIG. 293 (C) shows a low expectation degree effect. In the low expectation degree effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes each of the plurality of lens units 2684 to blink a plurality of times as in the high expectation degree effect. However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not cause the lower right effect display unit 2681 to emit light. As described above, since the plurality of lens units 2684 blinks a plurality of times in the same manner as the high expectation effect, the player is high in the effect while expecting an image to be displayed on the lower right effect display unit 2681. Can be interested. However, unlike the high expectation effect, since the image is not displayed on the lower right effect display unit 2681 in the low expectation effect, the player understands that the expectation is not so high.

  FIG. 293 (D) shows changes in the state of the lower right effect display portion 2681 and the plurality of lens portions 2684 following the states of FIGS. 293 (B) and 293 (C). After blinking each of the plurality of lens units 2684, the peripheral control MPU 4140a turns off all the lens units 2684 (in the high expectation effect, the light emission of the lower right effect display unit 2681 is also stopped). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the prefetching effect. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a again counts the number of game balls that have entered the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 from zero.

  The jackpot that is the target of the degree of expectation suggested in the prefetching effect may be any jackpot among a plurality of types of jackpots A to F, or may be a specific jackpot instead. Good. For example, the look-ahead effect may suggest the degree of expectation for winning one of the jackpots A, B, and F in which a long open jackpot game is performed.

  In the display example of FIG. 293, the case where the game ball enters the third start port 2415 in a state where the seven lens portions 2684 are lit is described. However, the number of the lit lens portions 2684 is eight. Also in the case described above, similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform a pre-reading effect using the received second type winning notification command. Here, when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 with one lens unit 2684 in the off state, all the lens units 2684 are entered by entering the game ball. Lights up. In this case, a prefetch effect may be performed by a special method. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may always realize a high expectation degree effect when the preceding determination result indicates a specific hit. In this way, when a high expectation effect is realized, the player can have a high expectation for a specific hit, so that the player can be highly interested in the subsequent effect. Furthermore, when the preceding determination result does not indicate a specific hit, the high expectation effect may not be realized. In this way, when the high expectation effect is realized, the player can be confident of a specific hit, so that the interest in the effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415 with one lens portion 2684 in the off state, a special lottery result in a variation corresponding to the winning of the game ball is obtained. Until the notification is made, the display of the count using the plurality of lens units 2684 may be stopped. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's attention from being disturbed by the lighting of the lens portion 2684, so that the player will have a special lottery result due to a special prize for lighting the last one unlit lens portion 2684. Can be observed calmly. Thereby, the stress which a player can feel can be relieved.

  Various effects may be realized in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. For example, the achievement effects described in FIGS. G to Q may be realized regardless of whether the operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is the promotion mode. In this way, if an achievement effect completely different from the effect of presenting various information using the symbols described in FIGS. A to F is employed, the game ball is placed in the second start port 2102 or the third start port 2415. It is possible to excite the joy that an inaccessible event has occurred. As a result, even if an undesired gaming state has continued for a long time (for example, when the game has continued without being blessed with a big hit), the stress that the player can feel can be alleviated. .

  As described above, when the game ball TM is received at the third start port 2415, the display means (here, the lower right effect is shown) to indicate the increase in the number of game balls TM received at the third start port 2415. The display by the display portion 2681 and the plurality of lens portions 2684 as a whole changes. Here, it is difficult to accept the game ball TM by the third start port 2415, although it is difficult to accept the game ball TM to the first start port 2101 compared to accepting the game ball TM. It is an event. Such an inaccessible event (acceptance of the game ball TM by the third start port 2415) does not occur frequently, so a player who can observe such an event continues to play for a long time. There are many cases. According to the above-described configuration, when such an irretrievable event occurs, the number of events that have occurred (accepted to the third start port 2415) is independent of the number of lottery information waiting for the start condition to be established. The display by the display means (the entire lower right effect display portion 2681 and the plurality of lens portions 2684) changes so as to indicate an increase in the number of game balls TM that have been played. Thus, even if an undesirable gaming state has continued for a long time (for example, when a game continues without a big hit), if such an inaccessible event occurs, Since an effect that expresses the accumulation of such difficult events is realized, the stress that the player can feel can be alleviated by such an effect. Further, the player can continue the game with an expectation that “what happens if the game ball TM is further received by the third start port 2415”. More specifically, the player expects that a large number of game balls TM will be received at the reception port (first start port 2101), and therefore the game ball TM is more easily received than the third start port 2415. It is possible to enjoy playing a game trying to put the game ball TM in the start port 2101. Here, the player expects the lottery result and production when the game ball TM is received by chance at the third start port 2415, even if it does not aim to receive the game ball TM by the third start port 2415, If the game can proceed and, fortunately, if the game ball TM is received at the third start port 2415, the player can expect a lottery result and further display means (lower right effect display unit 2681 and It is possible to enjoy an effect (a change in display that represents an increase in the number) due to the entire lens unit 2684. In this way, even when a player plays a game for a long time, the player can enjoy a game that is conscious of the two entrances, so that the player feels monotonous in the game. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, a display indicating that the number of game balls received in the third start port 2415 (or the second start port 2102) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value is displayed on the display means (here, the lower right effect display portion 2681 and the plurality of play balls). When a new game ball is received in the third start port 2415 in the state that is performed by the lens portion 2684 as a whole, a future expectation suggestion effect can be performed. When the game ball is accepted, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of a future expectation suggestion effect, that is, the result of the future lottery. In particular, even when an undesirable gaming state has continued for a long time (for example, when the game has continued without being blessed with a big hit), the game should be played in anticipation of future lottery results. Therefore, the stress that the player can feel can be alleviated by such effects. Furthermore, the player can also enjoy the game with the aim of accepting the game ball through the third start port 2415 in anticipation of realizing the future expectation suggestion effect. In this way, the player can enjoy the game even when aiming at the first start port 2101, and can also enjoy the game even when aiming at the third start port 2415, so that it is monotonous for a long time. The possibility that the game will continue can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, as a future expectation suggestion effect, a high expectation effect (FIG. 293 (B), corresponding to a high expectation display mode) and a low expectation level effect (FIG. 293 (C), corresponding to a low expectation display mode). Since either one is displayed by the display means (the entire lower right effect display portion 2681 and the plurality of lens portions 2684), the player can easily grasp the expected degree of the future lottery. As a result, even if an undesired gaming state has continued for a long time (for example, when the game continues without being blessed with a big hit), there is an effect that is difficult to grasp (an effect that suggests future expectations) Compared with the case where it is realized, the stress that the player can feel can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Outer frame 3 ... Main body frame 4 ... Game board 5 ... Door frame 3120 ... First start port sensor (start port sensor)
4212 ... First special random number generating means (random number generating means)
4214 ... 1st special symbol reservation storage means (hold storage means)
4216 ... First special symbol variation pattern selection means (big hit determination means)
4232 ... Advantageous gaming state generation means 4238 ... Command generation means 4300 ... Suggestion restriction means 4311 ... Big hit type determination means 4312 ... Reserved ball number confirmation means 4313 ... Start port passage confirmation means 4314 ... Latent probability suggestion notification means 4320 ... Latent probability suggestion degree Fluctuation means 4321 ... suggestion condition satisfaction number counting means 4322 ... suggestion degree setting means 4330 ... suggestion time control means 4331 ... time acquisition means 4332 ... suggestion time determination means 4340 ... latent probability suggestion restriction means 4341 ... effect execution confirmation means 4342 ... passing ball Number accumulating means 4343 ... suggestion notification control means 4350 ... latency limit setting acceptance means W ... timer

Claims (3)

A starter that allows game balls to enter,
Effect display means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area;
Jackpot determination means capable of performing jackpot determination processing as to whether or not the jackpot is based on a game ball entering the start opening;
A jackpot game process execution means for executing a jackpot game process in which a player can win a prize based on the result of the jackpot determination process being a jackpot;
Effect display control means capable of executing a predecessor showing a jackpot expectation degree in which the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot before the execution condition of the jackpot determination process is established,
As the starter, a first starter and a second starter that is easily received when the specific movable piece operates, are provided.
As the preceding effect, there is a specific preceding effect that can produce the effect execution condition only under specific conditions,
The jackpot determining means includes
A first jackpot determination means capable of performing a jackpot determination process when the starting opening into which the game ball is inserted is the first starting slot;
A second jackpot determining means capable of performing a jackpot determination process when the starting opening into which the game ball is inserted is the second starting slot;
Digestion order control means for controlling simultaneous digestion of the jackpot determination process by the first jackpot determination means and the jackpot determination process by the second jackpot determination means so that they are alternatively digested. Have
The effect display control means includes:
A display unit in which both the first effect display according to the result of the jackpot determination process by the first jackpot determination unit and the second effect display according to the result of the jackpot determination process by the second jackpot determination unit are common Specific display means that may appear in
Based on the result of control by the digestion order control means, the simultaneous display of the first effect display and the second effect display is avoided so that they can alternatively appear on the common display unit. Alternative production control means,
Second side specific display control means capable of executing control for causing a second side specific display to appear based on a game ball entering the second start port;
Both the entrance information of the game ball to the first start opening and the entrance information of the game ball to the second start opening can be acquired, and the first effect display and the second effect display are obtained. The number of appearances of the second side specific display according to the entry of the game ball to the second starter side, despite the fact that can be alternatively displayed on the common display unit And a specific preceding effect execution control means for controlling so that the effect execution condition for the specific preceding effect can be satisfied when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value,
The specific preceding effect executed by the establishment of the effect execution condition can be displayed in any of a plurality of patterns of display modes having different jackpot expectations .
When the performance execution condition that can be satisfied only under the specific condition is satisfied, it can be notified that the performance execution condition is satisfied. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game machine further comprising sound output control means for performing control related to sound output. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A gaming machine, further comprising a light emission control means for performing control related to light emission.